Panasonic KX-TEM824 Telephone User manual
Advanced Hybrid System
Feature Guide
KX-TES824
Model
KX-TEM824
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TES824/KX-TEM824: Version 2.0
Introduction
About this Feature Guide
The Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic
Advanced Hybrid System.
It explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities.
The Feature Guide is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Call Handling Features
Describes the features of the PBX related to making and receiving calls, and operating telephones.
Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features
Describes the features that allow the PBX to be configured and administered to suit the needs of its users.
Section 3, Programming Instructions
Serves as an overall system programming reference for the PBX.
Section 4, Appendix
Provides tables that describe the resource capacity of the PBX, as well as its different tones and ring tones.
References Found in the Feature Guide
Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.
Feature Guide References
Related sections of the Feature Guide are listed for your reference.
User Manual References
The User Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles.
Sections from the User Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.
PT Programming References
Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT (
2.3.2 PT Programming). These PT
programming items are noted throughout the Feature Guide for your reference by title and programme number. The following is an example of a PT Programming reference:
"Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type (
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If you are viewing this Feature Guide with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature
Guide and other PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• Feature Guide References
2 Feature Guide
• User Manual References
• PT Programming References
Notes
• Certain PTs, features, and optional service cards are not available in some areas. Consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Every system programming setting can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE
Maintenance Console software (
2.3.1 PC Programming). For programming details, refer to the on-
line help that is installed along with KX-TE Maintenance Console (
3.2.1 Installing and Starting KX-
The KX-TES824E, the KX-TES824NE, the KX-TES824GR, the KX-TES824CE/
KX-TEM824CE, and the KX-TES824PD/KX-TEM824PD are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of
European countries.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio
& Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact:
Panasonic Services Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Feature Guide 3
E
F
G
I
L
List of Abbreviations
A
B
C
D
O
P
S
T
U
V
G-CO
IRNA
SLT
SMDR
SMS
TAM
TRS
UCD
LCS
LED
O-CO
OGM
PF
PSTN
PT
S-CO
VM
VPS
CPC
DIL
DISA
DND
DRD
DSS
DTMF
EFA
AA
APT
ARS
BGM
BSS
BV
COS
FWD
4 Feature Guide
Automated Attendant
Analogue Proprietary Telephone
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Busy Station Signalling
Built-in Voice Message
Class of Service
Calling Party Control
Direct In Line
Direct Inward System Access
Do Not Disturb
Distinctive Ring Detection
Direct Station Selection
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
External Feature Access
Call Forwarding
Group-CO
Intercept Routing—No Answer
Live Call Screening
Light Emitting Diode
Other-CO
Outgoing Message
Programmable Feature
Public Switched Telephone Network
Proprietary Telephone
Single-CO
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
Short Message Service
Telephone Answering Machine
Toll Restriction
Uniform Call Distribution
Voice Mail
Voice Processing System
Feature Highlights
Built-in Voice Message (BV) (Optional voice message card required)
Built-in Voice Message (BV) allows a caller to leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or the PBX's common message area (
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)).
Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support (Optional Caller ID card required)
The PBX can relay incoming calls from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS. Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access. We recommend using SMS-enabled
Panasonic SLTs (
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support).
Caller ID Display on SLT (Optional Caller ID card required)
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of SLTs that support Caller ID as well as proprietary telephones (PTs) when receiving calls (
3-level Automated Attendant (AA)
3-level Automated Attendant (AA) service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (Direct Inward System
Access [DISA] AA number) following the guidance of 3-level DISA outgoing messages (OGMs), and be connected to the desired party automatically (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)).
Call Charge Calculation
The PBX can automatically calculate the approximate cost of calls and limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension. This feature allows users to calculate the cost of a call based on time, the leading digits of a phone number and/or the outside (CO) line carrying the call (
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
The PBX (with an optional message expansion card) can automatically log up to 10 000 incoming/outgoing outside (CO) line calls and 10 000 outgoing outside (CO) line calls for each extension. It is possible to log the Date, Time, Dial number, Duration and Charge of each call. The call logs can be output via the Serial
Interface (RS-232C) port to a PC, printer, etc. (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
PC Programming
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance
Console software as well as by using a PT (
The PBX software can be upgraded via the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port or USB port, using the KX-TE
Maintenance Console software (
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically configured the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software, or after the PBX data has been cleared (
2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type).
Advanced Hybrid System
This PBX supports the connection of PTs *1 , Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and single line devices such as SLTs, fax machines, wireless telephones, and data terminals.
*1 In this manual, "proprietary telephone" ("PT") means an analogue proprietary telephone (APT).
Feature Guide 5
Table of Contents
1
Call Handling Features......................................................................... 13
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.1.1
1.1.1.2
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.3.1
1.1.3.2
1.1.3.3
1.1.3.4
1.1.3.5
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.3
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features ............................................. 30
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
1.3.1.2
1.3.1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.1.1
1.4.1.2
1.4.1.3
1.4.1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.1.1
1.5.2
1.5.2.1
1.5.2.2
1.5.2.3
1.5.2.4
1.5.2.5
1.5.2.6
1.5.2.7
1.5.2.8
1.5.3
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.2
1.5.3.3
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
1.6.1.2
1.6.1.3
1.6.1.4
1.6.1.5
1.6.1.6
6 Feature Guide
1.6.1.7
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.9
1.9.1
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.10.5
1.10.6
1.10.7
1.10.8
1.10.9
1.11
1.11.1
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.12.4
1.12.5
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.1.1
1.13.1.2
1.14
1.14.1
1.15
1.15.1
1.15.2
1.15.3
1.15.4
1.15.5
1.15.6
1.15.7
1.16
1.16.1
1.16.2
1.17
1.17.1
Feature Guide 7
1.17.2
1.17.3
1.18
1.18.1
1.18.2
1.18.3
1.18.4
1.19
1.19.1
1.19.2
1.20
1.20.1
1.20.1.1
1.20.1.2
1.20.2
1.21
1.21.1
1.21.2
1.22
1.22.1
1.22.2
2
System Configuration and Administration Features ...................... 171
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
3
Programming Instructions................................................................. 199
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
8 Feature Guide
Feature Guide 9
10 Feature Guide
Feature Guide 11
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.3
4.3.1
12 Feature Guide
Section 1
Call Handling Features
Feature Guide 13
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1
Incoming Call Features
1.1.1
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features
1.1.1.1
Direct In Line (DIL)
Description
Directs incoming outside (CO) line calls to a preprogrammed destination based on the outside (CO) line carrying the call. Each outside (CO) line can have a different destination for each time service mode.
[Programming Example]
The table can be programmed for each outside (CO) line.
Outside (CO) Line No.
(Cont.) :
:
1
2
8
DIL
DIL
:
:
Normal
Day
Distribution method and destination*
Lunch
101
103
:
:
–
DIL
DIL
:
:
Normal
102
103
:
:
–
DIL
DIL
:
:
Normal
Night
102
103
:
:
–
*
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
In this example:
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a)
In day mode: Direct In Line (DIL) distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension 101.
b)
In lunch/night mode: DIL distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension
102.
Conditions
• To use this feature, "DIL" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port. When "Normal" is selected, an incoming outside (CO) line call is received at the extensions
assigned in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410].
• This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls, but can only be used by a single extension to receive calls.
• If a DIL destination is an extension within an extension group that has enabled the Idle Extension
Hunting feature and it is busy, the Idle Extension Hunting feature becomes active (
Feature Guide References
14 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.2
Intercept Routing
Description
Redirects incoming outside (CO) line calls via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) feature to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not, or cannot, answer the call. There are 2 types of Intercept Routing, described below.
Type
No Dial
Intercept
Routing—No
Answer (IRNA)
Description
While or after hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM) or after hearing a dial tone
(short beep), if the caller does not dial anything or enters an unrecognised input, the call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch
If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period (
Ring Time before Intercept [508], UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the call is
redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Feature Guide 15
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.2
Internal Call Features
Description
There are 2 types of internal calls, described below.
Feature
Intercom Call
Doorphone Call
Description
A call from one extension to another.
Details in
A call made from a doorphone to its preprogrammed destination for the current time service mode, assigned to the doorphone's port (
16 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3
Incoming Call Indication Features
1.1.3.1
Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW
Description
Extension telephones can indicate an incoming call in various ways, described below.
Indication Type
Ring/No Ring
Ring Tone
Feature
Outside (CO) Line
Ringing Selection
Ring Tone Pattern
Selection
Description Details in
Each extension can be programmed to ring or not ring when receiving an outside
(CO) line call.
A telephone rings when receiving a call.
A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type.
Voice-calling Alternate
Receiving—Ring/
Voice
Proprietary telephone (PT) users can choose how their telephones receive intercom calls, by selecting to hear ring tones or the caller's voice.
LED (Light Emitting
Diode)
Display (Caller
Information)
Tone During a
Conversation
LED Indication
The LED indicators on a PT can indicate the status of different lines using light patterns and colours.
Display Information A user's PT can show a variety of information on the display, such as the outside (CO) line number, the caller's name and number, the extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded, etc.
Call Waiting
When an extension user is in the middle of a call, the user can be alerted to a new call by a call waiting tone.
Feature Guide 17
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.2
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Description
An extension user can select whether the telephone will ring or not when receiving call(s) from assigned or all outside (CO) lines through personal programming.
Conditions
• System programming determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode (
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]).
• If an outside (CO) line call reaches a user's extension, but the extension is set to not ring, the CO button will flash. The outside (CO) line call can be answered by pressing the flashing CO button.
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
18 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.3
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Description
A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type, such as intercom calls (
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]), calls from each doorphone (
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]),
and calls from each outside (CO) line (
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]).
Available ring tone patterns are as follows:
[Ring Tone Patterns]
1 s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
*
* S-Double is available for doorphone calls only.
Conditions
• The ring tone pattern for incoming calls (intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls) to a single line telephone (SLT) can be fixed to "Single" or "Double" for each extension through system programming
(
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]). The length of the ring tone pattern depends on the preprogrammed
length of the bell-on signal (
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), combined with the ratio between the bell
signals of the SLT (
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]). Depending on the type of SLT being used, the
SLT may not ring properly, if the ring tone pattern of the SLT is set differently from that used by the telephone company.
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Feature Guide 19
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.4
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
Description
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) is only available in New Zealand.
The PBX can detect the following 4 ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company for each outside
(CO) line. When the PBX detects one of the ring tone patterns, the call will be transferred to the preprogrammed destination(s) automatically according to system programming. In addition, the extension ring tone pattern for the detected call can be assigned through system programming as shown below.
[Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company]
1 s
Pattern 1
(Normal)
Pattern 2
(Voice)
Pattern 3
(Modem/Voice)
Pattern 4
(Fax)
Pattern
1
2
3
4
Destination assigned in
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-
410], or sent to the Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) line or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) group
Ring Tone Pattern assigned in
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—
Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434]
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—
Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434]
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
Conditions
• To use this feature, "UCD", "DISA", or "Normal" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and DRD must be
enabled (
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)).
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
20 Feature Guide
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.1 Incoming Call Features
Feature Guide 21
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.5
Call Waiting
Description
A busy extension user can be alerted to a new call by Call Waiting. The busy extension user can then answer the second call either by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
If Call Waiting is enabled, a call waiting tone will be sent to the user under the following conditions:
a)
When an outside (CO) line call or a doorphone call is received, or
b)
When another extension executes the Busy Station Signalling (BSS) feature.
If disabled, a reorder tone will be sent to the extension that executed the BSS feature.
Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Besides the Call Waiting feature provided by the PBX, you can also subscribe to your telephone company's
Call Waiting service and receive call waiting tones through the telephone company's lines. This feature is available when an extension is in a conversation with an outside party, and a call is received from another outside party on the same outside (CO) line. The external call waiting tone will alert an extension user of the incoming outside (CO) line call that is waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. If a call waiting tone is heard but the corresponding CO button does not flash, this tone is an external call waiting tone from the telephone company. For details, consult your telephone company.
Conditions
•
Data Line Security
When an extension user activates Data Line Security, Call Waiting is turned off (
•
Call Waiting Tone
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred call waiting tone through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection).
•
Caller ID Information
When an extension receives a call waiting tone, the caller's information will flash on the display for 5 seconds at 15-second intervals.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
22 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2
Receiving Group Features
1.2.1
Idle Extension Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the call to an idle member of the same extension group, if that group has been assigned as an idle extension hunting group through system programming (
Hunting Group Set [100]). Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a
preprogrammed hunting type (
This feature is also known as Station Hunting.
Type
Circular Hunting
Description
An idle extension is searched for in a circular fashion one time according to the numerical order of the jacks.
Incoming call
Extn.
Numerical order
Busy
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Terminated Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the numerical order of the jacks, until reaching the extension that is connected to the highest-numbered jack in the group.
Incoming call
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Numerical order
Busy
Extn.
Highestnumbered jack
Busy
Extn.
Conditions
•
Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls directed to a single extension.
• An extension can belong to only one extension group (
Extension Group [600]). One hunting type
can be programmed for each extension group.
• If all the searched extensions in an idle extension hunting group are busy, a busy tone will be heard at the extension that made the intercom call (including Direct Inward System Access [DISA] calls).
• A user can leave an idle extension hunting group temporarily by logging out of the group, and rejoin the group by logging back in (
•
FWD/DND Mode
When searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set
FWD, DND, or Log-out will be skipped (
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)).
However, if the extension that receives the call first has set FWD or DND, Idle Extension Hunting will
Feature Guide 23
1.2 Receiving Group Features
not function and the call will be forwarded to the preprogrammed destination (when FWD is set) or will not be received at all (when DND is set).
•
Message Waiting
A message waiting indication will not be sent to an idle extension hunting destination.
The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on at the original destination only (
Feature Guide References
24 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) distributes incoming calls to an idle member of the same extension group, if that group has been assigned as a UCD group through system programming (
Available extensions are searched for in a circular fashion in numerical order. The UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension typically receives more calls than other extensions.
[Example of UCD Group]
The numbers found in circles below indicate calls and the order in which they arrived.
Calls arrive at the UCD group.
Call Distribution
Calls are distributed in the numerical order of the jacks.
Queuing
When the destination extension is busy or is logged out, the call waits in the queue and a UCD OGM is sent to the caller.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
3
Extn.
C
Extn.
D
Extn. A receives the first call.
UCD starts searching from extn. B
(Skips extn. A).
When the second call arrives at extn. B, the third call will be directed to extn. C.
Feature Guide 25
1.2 Receiving Group Features
[Flowchart]
Goes to C
A UCD call from an outside party is received.
The call reaches the UCD group.
Busy Rings (when an extension is available)
A
B
UCD OGM
Music on Hold is sent to the caller.
Busy
Did the UCD Busy
Waiting Time expire?
No
Goes to A
Goes to B
Yes
What is the
Rings (when an extension is available)
The call is established.
(UCD Ring Time before
Intercept expires)
The call is not answered.
UCD Busy Mode?
Is Intercept Routing employed?
Yes
No
The call is disconnected.
The call is directed to another extension.
C
Intercept-Normal Disconnect Disconnect-OGM Intercept-DISA
(UCD Ring Time after
Intercept expires)
A UCD OGM is sent to the caller.
The call is established.
The call is not answered.
The call is disconnected.
The call is disconnected.
A DISA OGM is sent to the caller.
The call is disconnected.
Goes to DISA
UCD Busy Mode
When all extensions in a UCD group are busy, a call will wait for a preprogrammed length of time (
according to system programming (
a)
Disconnect: The call is disconnected immediately.
b)
Disconnect-OGM: The call is disconnected after a UCD outgoing message (OGM) plays (e.g.,
"We are still handling other calls. Please call back later.").
c)
Intercept-Normal: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations (
d)
Intercept-DISA: The call is directed to the DISA feature (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)) and the caller hears a DISA OGM (e.g., "Thank you for calling Company A. Press 1 to
speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").
26 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
UCD Intercept Mode
When extensions in a UCD group are available but do not answer an outside (CO) line call within a preprogrammed length of time (
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the PBX will handle the call in
one of the following ways according to system programming (
a)
Disconnect: The call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
b)
Intercept: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations (
Lunch [408-410]). The extensions that receive the redirected call ring for a preprogrammed time
period (
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
Conditions
• To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
•
UCD OGM
It is possible to select the UCD OGM sent to the caller when a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions in the group are busy (
• The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension (
1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member
of a group cannot log out.
•
FWD/DND Mode
When searching for an available extension, any extension that has set FWD—All Calls, FWD—Busy/
No Answer, or DND will be skipped (
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)).
•
UCD Busy Waiting Time
It is possible to assign the length of time (
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]) the PBX holds an incoming
outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy, and to assign the interval time between the repeated UCD OGMs (
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]).
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 27
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
Description
A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All extensions in the DISA ring group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination (
DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing
Each extension can be programmed for Delayed Ringing (
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-
answered by pressing the flashing button even if the extension is not ringing.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Extn.
D
Immediately ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing:
Rings after a specified time delay.
Conditions
• To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), and DISA AA service must be assigned as the
destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature (
• The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension (
1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member
of a group cannot log out.
• The Delayed Ringing feature does not apply to DISA or Direct In Line (DIL) calls. If the destination is a
DISA ring group, this feature will function.
Feature Guide References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
28 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.4
Log-in/Log-out
Description
Members of an idle extension hunting group, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group, or Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) groups manually. Group members can log in at the beginning of a work shift when they are ready to answer calls, and log out at the end of the work shift.
Conditions
• The last member of a group cannot log out.
• While logged out from a group, a member extension will not receive calls to that group via the DISA,
UCD, or Idle Extension Hunting features.
•
Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Log-in/Log-out button. It shows the current status as follows:
Status
Red on
Off
Light Pattern
Logged out
Logged in
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
User Manual References
1.5.4 Leaving a Group (Log-in/Log-out)
Feature Guide 29
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Features
1.3.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.3.1.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW
Description
When an extension user cannot answer calls (is on a call, out of the office, etc.), it is possible to forward or refuse calls directed to that extension using the following features:
1.
Call Forwarding (FWD)
2.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.
FWD
Extension users can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations (
2.
DND
An extension user can send a DND tone to let the caller know that he or she is not available (
Conditions
•
FWD/DND Button
If a proprietary telephone (PT) does not have an FWD/DND button, a flexible CO button can be customised as an FWD/DND button.
[Button Status]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Red on
Slow red flashing
Off
DND on
FWD on
FWD/DND off
Status
• Setting a new FWD mode, such as All Calls or Busy/No Answer, or the DND feature, clears the status of the previous FWD mode or DND feature.
Feature Guide References
30 Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.2
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Description
Extension users can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are 4 Call Forwarding (FWD) modes, described below.
Mode
All Calls
Busy/No Answer
To Outside (CO) Line
Follow Me
Description
All calls are forwarded to another extension.
All calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user's line is busy, or when the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time period (
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]).
All calls are forwarded to an outside party, provided this feature is enabled for each extension through system programming (
When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving his or her desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
Incoming Intercom Calls/
Outside (CO) Line Calls
Extension
Forwarded to:
1. Another Extension
2. Outside Party
3. VPS
4. BV
[Available Destinations]
Destination
Extension (proprietary telephone [PT]/single line telephone [SLT])
Automatic Line Access no. + Phone no.
–
Outside (CO) Line Group Access no. + Outside
(CO) Line Group no. + Phone no.
Voice Processing System (VPS)
Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature no.
Availability
Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is enabled for the extension through system programming (
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is enabled for the extension through system programming (
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
–
Only available when the BV feature is enabled for the extension through system programming (
Conditions
[General]
• This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall, Camp-on Recall, and Timed Reminder.
Feature Guide 31
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
• The types of calls that are forwarded by this feature are:
Outside (CO) line calls
Call Type
Normal except for FWD to Outside (CO) Line; Direct In Line (DIL);
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Extension, Transfer Intercom calls
•
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
When searching for an available extension within a UCD group, any extension that has set FWD will be skipped. However, if the last extension that can receive a call has set FWD, the call will be forwarded to that extension's call forwarding destination. The last member of a UCD group cannot log out.
• When a call is forwarded, the corresponding message waiting indication is not forwarded. The
MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on only at the originally called extension (
• It is programmable whether the calls received on outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" (
Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) are forwarded for each extension or not (
Selection [963]). If FWD is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is a VPS or Telephone
Answering Machine (TAM) and the extension has been assigned to ring with other extensions, the VPS or TAM may answer the call before other extensions can answer it. To prevent this, disable FWD.
• A call can only be automatically forwarded one time. In the example below, extension A's calls are being forwarded to extension B. If extension B tries to set FWD to extension C, the extension B user hears a reorder tone and the setting is denied. If extension B has already set FWD to extension C, and extension A tries to set FWD to extension B, the setting is also denied.
A A
B C B C
• The destination of an extension's forwarded calls can call or transfer calls to the original extension.
FWD—All Calls
Incoming call
Original
Call or transfer a call
FWD destination
[Busy/No Answer]
•
No Answer Time
The length of time before calls are forwarded is programmable (
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]).
[To Outside (CO) Line]
•
FWD to Outside (CO) Line
System programming determines the extensions that can forward all intercom calls and certain outside
(CO) line calls to an outside party (
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). These outside (CO) line calls
must arrive on outside (CO) lines whose programming (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416])
is one of the following:
a)
DIL
32 Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features b)
DISA (only when the call is directly sent to an extension, not intercepted)
c)
UCD (when only one member belongs to the group)
•
Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
If a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer
(
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the
timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected (
• If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.
User Manual References
1.5.1 Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV])
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide 33
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.3
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description
Extension users can use this feature to prevent calls from ringing at their extension. The calling extension will hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone.
Conditions
•
DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by extensions that are allowed to override DND through system programming (
• This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall, Camp-on Recall, and Timed Reminder.
• Calls from outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" or "DIL" (
button will flash when an outside (CO) line call is received, and the user can answer the call by pressing this button.
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
34 Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4
Answering Features
1.4.1
Answering Features
1.4.1.1
Answering Features—OVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can answer incoming calls using the following methods:
Called
Extension
A user's own
extension
(proprietary telephone [PT])
Another extension
Feature
Line Preference—
Incoming
Direct One-touch
Answering
Hands-free
Answerback
A user's own
extension (single line telephone
[SLT])
Receiving Calls
Call Pickup
Description Details in
A user can select the method to answer incoming calls.
A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the flashing CO or INTERCOM button.
–
A user can answer calls automatically and establish a hands-free conversation.
• 1.4.1.4 Handsfree Answerback
A user can answer an incoming call simply by going off-hook.
–
A user can pick up a call to a specific extension, a call within the user's extension group, or a call received by a Telephone
Answering Machine (TAM) extension.
Feature Guide 35
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.2
Line Preference—Incoming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following
3 line preferences.
Each of these line preferences can be selected by each extension through personal programming (Line
Preference—Incoming).
Type
No Line
Prime Line
Ringing Line (default)
Description
A user can select a line by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access button to answer an incoming call after going off-hook.
A user can answer a call arriving at a flexible CO button (assigned as the
"Prime Line") simply by going off-hook.
A user can answer a call ringing at one's own telephone simply by going off-hook.
Conditions
• Ringing methods can be selected from among immediate, delayed, no ringing, or no incoming calls
(disable) through system programming (
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed
Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]).
• A single line telephone (SLT) user can select "Ringing Line" mode only.
• A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO],
Group-CO [G-CO] or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference.
• Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference.
• In "Prime Line" mode, if a PT user receives an incoming call on a line other than the "Prime Line", the user must go off-hook and then press the corresponding flashing CO button to answer the call.
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
36 Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.3
Call Pickup
Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at another extension by entering the appropriate feature numbers.
The following types of Call Pickup are available:
Type
Directed Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
Description
A call to a specific extension is answered.
A call to an extension in the same extension group (
A call received by a preprogrammed TAM extension (
Call Retrieving from a
Telephone Answering
Machine (TAM)
Call Pickup Deny
An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension. If this feature is enabled, other users will hear a reorder tone when trying to pick up calls.
Conditions
[Directed/Group Call Pickup]
•
Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom calls, outside (CO) line calls, and doorphone calls.
• An extension user will hear a confirmation tone when he or she picks up the call with the Directed Call
Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming
(
• Calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall cannot be picked up with the Directed/Group Call Pickup feature.
[Group Call Pickup]
• By setting system programming (
Pickup Group [127]) in advance, an extension user can pick up a
call to another extension in the same extension group simply by going off-hook, even if his or her extension is not ringing.
User Manual References
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Feature Guide 37
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.4
Hands-free Answerback
Description
A user with a speakerphone-equipped proprietary telephone (PT) can answer intercom calls automatically without lifting the handset. When a call is received at an extension that is in Hands-free Answerback mode, the caller hears a confirmation tone and the called extension hears a beep tone. Then the conversation is automatically established.
Conditions
•
Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls (not including outside (CO) line calls or doorphone calls)
• When an intercom call/outside (CO) line call is transferred to an extension, this feature is overridden and a ring tone is heard.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
38 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5
Making Call Features
1.5.1
Intercom Call Features
1.5.1.1
Intercom Call
Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
•
Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers (
Extension Number [009]) and names (
Extension Name [604], Extension
of the other extension are shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs).
•
DSS Button
It is possible to call another extension simply by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection
(DSS) button (
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can be customised
as a DSS button.
The DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also be used.
•
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after hearing a confirmation tone.
•
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party's preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. This setting is active for the current call only, after which it reverts to the called party's previous setting.
• The extension ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls can be selected through system programming (
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]). The ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom
calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls can also be selected through system programming (
•
Tone after Dialling
After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:
Type
Ringback Tone
Confirmation Tone
Busy Tone
DND Tone
Description
Indicates the call is being received at the called party's extension.
Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Indicates the called party's extension is busy.
Indicates the called party has set Do Not Disturb (DND).
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 39
1.5 Making Call Features
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2.5 Switching the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
40 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2
Outside (CO) Line Call Features
1.5.2.1
Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can use the following features when making an outside (CO) line call:
Feature
Emergency Call
Account Code Entry
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pause Insertion
Description Details in
A user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes.
A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) mode if necessary.
A dialling pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button, or can be automatically inserted after a user-dialled code, such as a Host PBX Access code or Automatic
Pause Insertion code. The length of the pause can be specified through system programming.
Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Feature Guide 41
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.2
Emergency Call
Description
An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers (
seizing an outside (CO) line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
• If the PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, an extension user must dial the Host PBX Access code after the Outside (CO) Line Access number.
• This feature will function even when:
– In Account Code—Verify-All/Verify-Toll/Forced mode (
– Restricted by the current class of service (COS) (
– The total of call charges has reached a specified budget limit (
– In Extension Lock (
42 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.3
Account Code Entry
Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing outside (CO) line calls for accounting and billing purposes.
Account codes are appended to SMDR call records (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature),
and have several uses. For example, a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client's account code as shown on the SMDR call record.
There are 4 methods of entering account codes, explained below. One method is assigned to each extension through system programming (
Mode
Option
Forced
Verify-All
Verify-Toll
Description
An extension user can (but is not required to) enter a 4-digit account code during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation ends when a record is needed.
An extension user must always enter a 4-digit account code within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. This method ensures that extension users will not forget to enter account codes.
An extension user must always enter a preprogrammed account code (
Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line.
If the entered code does not match any preprogrammed code, the user will hear a reorder tone.
An extension user can enter a preprogrammed account code (
Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line to override
TRS (
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code). Classes
of service (COSs) 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to COS 2.
COSs 1 and 2 will not be affected. If the entered account code is also registered as an extension password, the extension password feature will be given priority. The COS of the corresponding extension will be applied.
Conditions
• An account code can be stored in Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling, Hot Line, Speed Dialling—
System/Personal, Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line, etc.). In this case, the Account Code feature number and specified account code must be entered after the Outside (CO) Line Access number.
• An extension user does not need to enter an account code for incoming outside (CO) line calls.
• Even in Forced/Verify-All/Verify-Toll mode, emergency calls can be made without an account code (
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 43
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.4
Dial Type Selection
Description
The dialling mode can be selected for each outside (CO) line through system programming (
Mode
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-
Frequency)
Pulse (Rotary)
Call Blocking
Description
Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO) line using tones. If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, select this mode as necessary. If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies
DTMF lines, select this mode.
Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO) line using pulses.
If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and
Pulse signals but the contract specifies Pulse lines, select this mode.
When dialling with a touch-tone telephone, only Pulse signals will be sent to the telephone company.
Conditions
• Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type*
The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming (
system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of
the connected outside (CO) lines is Call Blocking. If your telephone company can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority:
DTMF Pulse (High) Pulse (Low)
• Pulse to Tone Conversion*
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to access special services such as computer-accessed long-distance calling or voice mail services. To switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period after the outside (CO) line is connected, or press the " #" key. This feature functions only on outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode (
Dial Mode [401]). DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode.
• The pulse rate for outside (CO) lines that have been set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode (
Speed [402]) should be selected depending on your telephone company or a host PBX. There are 2
pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).
• It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have been set to "DTMF" mode (
• It is programmable whether DTMF dialling is sent to the telephone company when an extension user redials after changing from Pulse mode to DTMF mode by pressing the " #" key (
Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]).
• * These features are not available for the AL (Australia) model.
User Manual References
1.4.9 Changing the Dialling Mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion)
44 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.5
Reverse Circuit
Description
The PBX can detect the reverse signal sent from the telephone company when an extension user tries to make an outside (CO) line call. This detects the start (the called party goes off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside (CO) line call. The duration of the call can be verified with SMDR using this feature (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
This feature is also known as Polarity Reverse Detection.
Conditions
• If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line (
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will automatically start the timer (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the
outside party answers the call.
Feature Guide 45
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.6
CO Busy Out
Description
The PBX can monitor the loop current sent through outside (CO) lines, preventing users from seizing lines where a loop current is not detected. When loop currents are not detected, outside (CO) lines are set to
Busy Out status, and cannot be used to make calls (
CO Busy Out [154]). An outside (CO) line in Busy
Out status cannot be selected for making a call by Automatic Line Access or Outside (CO) Line Group
Access, or by using the Other-CO (O-CO) button. If a user tries to seize an outside (CO) line set to Busy
Out status, the user will hear a reorder tone and a message is shown on the display of the Proprietary
Telephone (PT).
This is useful if some or all outside (CO) lines are occasionally unavailable because of problems with the external telecommunications environment.
Conditions
• Loop current detection is performed on active outside (CO) lines whenever the line is seized and/or at a preprogrammed time every day.
• By performing loop current detection at a preprogrammed time every day (
[154] returns all outside (CO) lines to in-service status.
• Incoming calls can be received on outside (CO) lines set to Busy Out status. In this case, Busy Out status is cleared.
• Busy Out status is maintained even when the PBX is restarted.
46 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.7
Pause Insertion
Description
A dialling pause of a preprogrammed length can be inserted manually or automatically when dialling.
Manual Pause Insertion: A pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button.
Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted after the user dials any one of the following numbers:
a)
Outside (CO) Line Access number
b)
Automatic Pause Insertion code
c)
Host PBX Access code (
1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Conditions
• The pause length is programmable for each outside (CO) line (
• When a dialled telephone number matches one of the Automatic Pause Insertion codes assigned through system programming (
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]), a pause will be automatically
inserted after the code. This is particularly convenient if a second dial tone is sent from your telephone company.
• This feature functions for Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, Last Number Redial, Saved Number
Redial, Hot Line, and Call Forwarding (FWD)—To Outside (CO) Line, as well as for normal calls.
Feature Guide 47
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.8
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension jacks of the host PBX to outside (CO) line ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code, assigned through system programming (
Host PBX Access Code [403]), is required to access the telephone company from the host
PBX. The Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0
*1
, or 81 through 88) of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code for each outside (CO) line of this PBX. A pause of a preprogrammed length (
Pause Time [417]) will be automatically inserted after the user-dialled Host PBX Access code.
[Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX Access Code for PBX, or Automatic Line
Access No. for Host PBX: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Automatic Line
Access No.: 9
Outside (CO) line 1
PBX
Extn. 101 Extn. 102
Dials "0-01-23-4567".
Host PBX
Access Code
Telephone
No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".
Automatic Line
Access No.
Telephone No.
Host PBX
Access Code
Dials "9-101".
Automatic Line
Access No.
Extn. No.
of the Host PBX
Note
In this example, "0" should be assigned as the Host PBX Access code for outside (CO) line 1 of this
PBX.
*1 For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
48 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
Conditions
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (
1.10.7 External Feature Access
•
TRS
TRS checks only the dialled telephone number, excluding the Host PBX Access code, when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)).
•
SMDR
The Host PBX Access code can be logged by SMDR along with the dialled number when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
Feature Guide 49
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3
Seizing a Line Features
1.5.3.1
Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the line that is seized in order to make a call, using one of the following features:
Feature Description Details in
Line Preference—Outgoing
A user can select the line to be seized when going offhook.
Outside (CO) Line Access
A user can select the Outside (CO) Line Access method used when making outside (CO) line calls.
50 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3.2
Line Preference—Outgoing
Description
Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of seizing a line (Line Preference—Outgoing) to be used each time the user goes off-hook.
Method
Idle Line
No Line
Prime Line
Description
When a user goes off-hook, an idle outside (CO) line is selected automatically from among the assigned outside (CO) lines (
Designated Line Access [419]).
When a user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make a call, the user must select the desired line manually.
When a user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically.
Conditions
• A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO],
Group-CO [G-CO], or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference.
• Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference.
•
Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset line preference temporarily by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line
Access button or INTERCOM button before going off-hook.
• System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode (
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]).
• It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX (
are not connected.
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide 51
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3.3
Outside (CO) Line Access
Description
There are 3 methods of accessing an outside (CO) line.
Method
Automatic Line Access
(Local Access)
Outside (CO) Line Group
Access
S-CO Line Access
Description Operation
Selects an idle outside (CO) line automatically from the assigned outside (CO) lines (
Designated Line Access [419]).
If Idle Line Preference (
Line Preference—Outgoing) is set on
the extension through personal programming, the user can access an idle line simply by going off-hook.
Dial the Automatic Line Access number (9/0) * (
Note
*
For New Zealand, the
Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Selects an idle outside (CO) line from the corresponding outside (CO) line group.
Dial the Outside (CO) Line Group
Access number and an outside
(CO) line group number, or press a
Group-CO (G-CO) button.
Selects the desired outside (CO) line directly.
Press the Single-CO (S-CO) button.
Line Access Using the Other-CO (O-CO) Button
To select an idle outside (CO) line from among the outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-
CO buttons, the proprietary telephone (PT) user can press the O-CO button.
Conditions
• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time (
Dialling Start Time [206]) after seizing an
outside (CO) line before dialling.
•
Button Assignment
A flexible CO button can be customised as an S-CO, G-CO, or O-CO button as follows:
Type
Single-CO (S-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Other-CO (O-CO)
Assignable parameter
A specified outside (CO) line is assigned (Default: CO 1–CO 8).
An outside (CO) line group is assigned (
Outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons are assigned.
The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-CO button on the same PT.
The same outside (CO) line can be assigned to an S-CO button and a G-CO button.
Dialling the Outside (CO) Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority:
Once a flexible CO button is assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button, it indicates line status with a variety of light patterns (
•
Direct Outside (CO) Line Access
If a PT user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the PT automatically enables hands-free
52 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE or MONITOR button.
•
Outside (CO) Line Hunting Order for Automatic Line Access
The outside (CO) line hunting sequence (from highest-numbered outside (CO) line, or in rotation) for
Automatic Line Access can be determined through system programming (
• System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode (
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]).
• It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX (
are not connected.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 53
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6
Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1
Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.1
Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX. A stored number can be dialled by a simple operation.
1.
Features
Feature
One-touch Dialling
Storage Method
Personal Programming, System Programming
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling System Programming
Redial
Speed
Dialling
Details in
Last Number
The last or most recently dialled number is automatically stored.
Saved
Number
Personal
System
While in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, the current telephone number can be manually stored and redialled afterwards.
Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.5 Speed
System Programming
Quick Dialling
Hot Line
Incoming Call Log
System Programming
Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Caller ID information is automatically stored.
2.
Valid Input
0–9/ /#
Input
PAUSE (Pause)
Displayed while
Entering
0–9/ /#
P
Description
Store digits, , and # by pressing the corresponding buttons.
Store a dialling pause by pressing the PAUSE button (
54 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
Input
FLASH/RECALL
(Hooking)* 1
INTERCOM (Secret)*
1
F
Displayed while
[ or ]
Entering
Description
Store an EFA signal (EFA mode) by pressing the
FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number (
1.10.7 External Feature Access
Prevent all or part of a System Speed Dialling number or One-touch Dialling number from being displayed when a call is made, by pressing the
INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be hidden (Secret Dialling).
It is programmable whether the hidden part will be shown on SMDR (
Store a hyphen by pressing the CONF button.
CONF (Hyphen)*
2 -
* 1
Available only when in system/personal programming mode
* 2
Available only when in system programming mode
[Example of Secret Dialling]
When storing the number "91234567890", to prevent the telephone number "1234567890" from being displayed when making a call:
Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM
.
Notes
• The characters for secret code, "[" and "]" (entered by pressing the INTERCOM button), are counted as one digit each.
• It is not possible to hide the Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0 * , or 81 through 88) by pressing the INTERCOM button before dialling it.
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Conditions
•
Outside (CO) Line Access by Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling/System Speed Dialling)
A specific Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory
Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is performed after selecting an outside (CO) line, the stored
Outside (CO) Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected outside (CO) line.
Feature Guide 55
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.2
One-touch Dialling
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is possible by storing the number (up to 24 digits), such as an extension number, telephone number, account code, or feature number, as a One-touch Dialling button.
Conditions
•
One-touch Dialling Button
A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Programmable Feature (PF)/MESSAGE button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button.
• A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it as 2 separate Onetouch Dialling buttons. In this case, the Outside (CO) Line Access number should be stored in the first button.
• Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.
• Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the PF buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers.
Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number
"0", and vice versa.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
56 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.3
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Description
The MESSAGE button and each of the 8 One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 single line telephone (SLT) can be customised to dial an extension number, telephone number, or feature number (up to 24 digits) when the user presses that button. To allow easy configuration of multiple extensions, every KX-T7710 connected to the PBX can be customised with the same settings at once, through system programming (
One-touch Dialling [013]). This is useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications.
The KX-T7710 has 2 modes, "NORMAL" mode and "PBX" mode, selected by a switch on the telephone.
This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in "PBX" mode.
[Programming Example: KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling]
Location No.
1
2
3
(Cont.) :
:
9
Button
One-touch Dial 01
One-touch Dial 02
One-touch Dial 03
:
:
MESSAGE
Desired Number
100 (Front Desk)
76XX (Wake-up Call)
102 (Restaurant)
:
:
784#
Conditions
• System programming determines the SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension (
• If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message simply by pressing the MESSAGE button because the button includes the default value of Message Waiting Answer feature number.
• Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal
Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function.
• KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is available to users while hearing a dial tone.
• KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is not available to users when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone (PT).
• Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 57
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.4
Redial
Description
There are 2 types of Redial, described below.
Type
Last Number Redial
Saved Number Redial
Description
Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled, allowing the same number to be easily redialled.
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can save a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later. The saved number is kept until a new number is stored.
Automatic Redial
If Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, the number will be automatically redialled a preprogrammed number of times (
Repeat Count [113]) at a preprogrammed interval (
Automatic Redial Interval [114]). This feature is only
available on PT models that have an SP-PHONE or MONITOR button.
Conditions
[General]
• Up to 64 digits plus the Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored and redialled for each Redial type.
• Automatic Redial is cancelled if any other number is dialled, or if an incoming call is answered.
• Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature.
• Automatic Redial is not available for some countries/areas.
[Last Number Redial]
• The stored telephone number is replaced whenever a new number is dialled.
[Saved Number Redial]
•
Save Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Save button.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.2.3 Redialling
58 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.5
Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Description
An extension user can use short numbers to frequently dialled numbers that are stored in the PBX, either in the extension's Personal Speed Dialling or in System Speed Dialling.
Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
Conditions
[General]
• Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Personal Speed Dialling
(up to 24 digits) and System Speed Dialling (up to 32 digits).
• This feature is not available on rotary single line telephones (SLTs).
[Personal Speed Dialling]
• Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the
Programmable Feature (PF) buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers.
Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number
"0", and vice versa.
• An SLT user can check the stored number by exchanging the SLT with a PT. PF buttons (F1 through
F10) correspond to Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9). Press the desired PF button to check the number.
[System Speed Dialling]
• TRS for System Speed Dialling (
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301])
Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the class of service (COS) of
System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension (
• System Speed Dialling numbers (
System Speed Dialling Number [001]) and names (
Speed Dialling Name [011]) can be assigned through system programming. The assigned name will be
shown on the display of a proprietary telephone (PT) when an extension user makes calls using this feature.
•
Caller's Name
If the dialled number matches a number stored in the System Speed Dialling table with an assigned name, the assigned name will be shown on the display (
• System Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
3.3.2 System Programming
Feature Guide 59
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.6
Quick Dialling
Description
Using Quick Dialling, an extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is possible by storing the number (up to 10 digits), such as extension number, telephone number, or feature number, for Quick
Dialling through system programming (
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]).
[Programming Example: Quick Dialling]
Code No.
50
51
(Cont.) :
:
59
Desired Number
#34
#43
:
:
912345678
In this example: a)
The feature number for Paging—External, "#34", is stored with the code number "50". Users can make paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "50".
b)
The feature number for Paging—Answer, "#43", is stored with the code number "51". Users can answer paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "51".
c)
A telephone number, "912345678", is stored with the code number "59". Users can call this outside number by going off-hook and then dialling "59".
Conditions
•
This feature is available when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009] (
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
60 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.7
Hot Line
Description
A single line telephone (SLT) user can make an outgoing call to a previously stored telephone number (up to 32 digits) simply by going off-hook. If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a special dial tone (dial tone 2) is generated for a preprogrammed time period (
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]), and then
dialling starts. During this waiting time, the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
Conditions
• This feature cannot be programmed on rotary SLTs.
• This feature will not function when the extension user goes off-hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold.
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide 61
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7
Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.1
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Description
If the dialled extension or outside (CO) line is busy when a call is made, the caller can choose to be informed by a callback ring (Camp-on Recall) when the extension or outside (CO) line becomes free.
When the user answers the callback ring:
For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing without the user having to redial.
For an outside (CO) line call: The line is seized.
Conditions
• If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds (4 rings), the callback is cancelled.
• More than one extension user can set this feature to monitor the same destination extension or outside
(CO) line at the same time.
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
62 Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.2
Executive Busy Override
Description
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call.
Executive Busy Override Deny
It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.
Conditions
• System programming determines extension users who can use Executive Busy Override (
• This feature will not function when the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data
Line Security (
• When a 2-party conversation is changed to a 3-party conference call, a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties (
1.13.1.2 Conference). It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming
(
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.4 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
Feature Guide 63
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.3
Call Waiting Tone
Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a conversation), a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting.
Conditions
• This feature functions only if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.
• One of 2 call waiting tones (Tone 1 or Tone 2) can be selected through personal programming (Call
Waiting Tone Type Selection). For doorphone calls, Tone 1 is used as a call waiting tone (not
changeable). Tone 2 depends on the assignments in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] for outside (CO)
line calls and in Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] for intercom calls.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
64 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.1
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Description
Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised outside (CO) line calls.
Every extension is assigned to one of 5 classes of service (COSs) for each time service mode (
(CO) line calls to be made, and COS 5 grants the lowest level of authorisation. COSs 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls with a combination of preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables, explained below.
Denied Code Tables (
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305])
Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the telephone numbers that are restricted. All outgoing outside (CO) line calls made by COS 2 through 5 users are compared to the applicable Denied
Code Table(s), and when the leading number of a dialled telephone number (not including the Outside (CO)
Line Access number) matches an entry found in an applicable table, the call is denied.
Up to a total of 80 denied codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored.
Exception Code Tables (
Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers that are checked against every dialled number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a dialled number is prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to the applicable Exception Code Table(s). If the dialled number matches an entry found in an applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted.
Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes depends on the COS assigned to each extension.
Applicable tables by COS
The Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables that apply to each COS are listed below.
COS No.
1
2
3
4
5
Denied Code Tables
No restriction.
(Not Programmable)
Exception Code Tables
No restriction.
(Not Programmable)
20 denied codes programmed in [302].
(Table for Class 2)
80 exception codes (code numbers 01–80) programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 5)
40 denied codes programmed in [302] and
[303].
(Tables for Classes 2 and 3)
60 exceptions codes (code numbers 01–60) programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 3 through 5 )
60 denied codes programmed in [302] through [304].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 4)
80 denied codes programmed in [302] through [305].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 5)
40 exception codes (code numbers 01–40) programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 4 and 5)
20 exception codes (code numbers 01–20) programmed in [306].
(Table for Class 5)
Feature Guide 65
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
COS 4
COS 5
Class 2 restriction
All outside (CO) line calls permitted.
Class 2 – 5 exceptions
Class 2 – 3 restrictions Class 3 – 5 exceptions
Class 2 – 4 restrictions
Class 2 – 5 restrictions
Class 4 – 5 exceptions
Class 5 exception
Calls are restricted Calls are permitted
TRS for System Speed Dialling (
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301])
Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension. If, for example, the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers is assigned as "2", the PBX will allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 1 and 2, but not allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 3, 4, and 5 according to TRS as follows:
COS No.
1 2
System Speed Dialling Class
3 4 5
1
2
3
4
5
Permitted
66 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
[Flowchart]
An extension user tries to make an outside (CO) line call.
Was the number dialled using
System Speed Dialling?
No
Yes
Yes
Is the COS number higher than the System Speed
Dialling Class?
No or Equal
COS 1
What is the COS number?
COSs 2–5
Is the dialled number found in an applicable Denied Code Table?
Yes
Is the dialled number found in an applicable Exception Code Table?
No
The call is denied.
The user hears a reorder tone.
No
Yes
The call is permitted.
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
• Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire services, should be stored (
[309]) so that they are not barred by TRS.
•
Host PBX Access Code/Carrier Exception Code
TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialled using a Host PBX Access code (
Feature Guide 67
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Carrier
Exception code.
Access Code Type
Host PBX Access
Code*
1
Carrier Exception
Code* 2
Access Code is stored in the PBX
Access Code is dialled
Access Code is not dialled
TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits.
TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits.
Number dialled is not an outside (CO) line call, so
TRS does not check the number.
TRS checks the entire number.
Access Code is not stored in the PBX
TRS checks the entire number.
TRS checks the entire number.
* 1
* 2
• The inter-digit timer (
Inter-digit Time [208]) applies until the TRS check is completed. When the timer
expires, the outgoing outside (CO) line call is disconnected while dialling, if enabled through system programming (
No Dial Disconnection [211]). For a single line telephone (SLT), an outgoing outside
(CO) line call will be released from the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) receiver when the inter-digit timer expires.
•
TRS—Extension Lock Class
The COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature (
Extension Lock) can be assigned (
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked
extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension (
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS
of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4.
• The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain nondigits ( or #)
(
TRS Check for * and # [125]). If TRS check is disabled, the PBX ignores any nondigits that are
dialled when checking, which is useful in preventing some unauthorised calls.
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
68 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.2
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Description
An extension user can override TRS temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone (
code before dialling the telephone number (
[Flowchart]
TRS Override by Account
Code is attempted.
Option/
Forced
Verify–All
What is the account code mode?
Verify–Toll
No
Does the entered account code match an extension password?
No
Does the entered account code match a stored account code?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is the COS number "1"?
No
The call is established with COS 2.
The call is established with the COS number of the corresponding extension.
The COS number remains the same as that of the extension being used.
Does the entered account code match a stored account code?
Yes
No
The call is denied.
The user hears a reorder tone.
Feature Guide 69
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
Conditions
• This feature functions only for extensions whose:
– Account code mode is set to "Verify-Toll" (
– Class of service (COS) number is set to 3 through 5.
• If the extension user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary
TRS check is performed.
• System programming determines whether SMDR (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording
makes a call using this feature (
• It is also possible to override TRS at another extension using the Walking COS feature (
Feature Guide References
70 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.3
Budget Management
Description
Limits telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension (
the total of call charges reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further outside (CO) line calls.
An extension assigned as the manager can increase the limit or clear the previous call charges through manager programming.
Conditions
•
Budget Limit Selection
The method of limiting calls can be selected through system programming (
a)
Enable: 3 sets of 3 beeps will be heard before an outside (CO) line call is disconnected due to budget limitation. The first set of beeps will be heard when the call reaches the last 3 units of remaining time. The call is disconnected as soon as the budget limit is reached, at the start of the final unit of time.
b)
Disable: The current call is not disconnected but other outside (CO) line calls cannot be made once the call has finished.
• During a 3-party Conference conversation, even if the budget limit of an extension is reached the call is not disconnected.
• Even when the call charge is set to "0" (
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation), calls cannot be made if the
budget limit of an extension has been reached. However, any numbers programmed as Emergency
Numbers can be dialled regardless of this (
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
User Manual References
3.2.2 Changing Call Logs and Call Charges
Feature Guide 71
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.4
Extension Lock
Description
Extension users can lock their telephones to prevent unauthorised use. This is useful for situations when extension users must leave their desks temporarily. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension.
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
•
Remote Extension Lock
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely lock or unlock an extension using a Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. This feature functions only if the operator or manager has set the extension password. When the operator or manager locks an extension remotely, the extension's user cannot unlock it. When a user locks an extension, the operator or manager extension can override the lock and unlock the extension.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
•
TRS—Extension Lock Class
The class of service (COS) of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature can be assigned (
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can
make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension (
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked
extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4.
•
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions simultaneously.
•
Extension Lock Button
A flexible DSS button on a DSS Console can be customised as an Extension Lock button.
• This feature also functions as Incoming Call Log Display Lock (
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager.
• This feature will not block Emergency Calls (
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock)
2.1.1 Locking Other Extensions (Remote Extension Lock)
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
72 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.5
Walking COS
Description
Extension users can temporarily assign their own class of service (COS) to another extension, allowing them to make calls as if from their own telephones.
This feature is useful when a manager or supervisor needs to borrow another employee's telephone to make a call. The superior enters the extension password followed by the Walking COS feature number and his or her extension number, and then makes the call. The same privileges and restrictions normally applied to a user are applied when using Walking COS.
Conditions
• When making a call with Walking COS, the extension number of the Walking COS user's extension is also logged by SMDR (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide 73
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9.1
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Description
The PBX automatically selects the least expensive route (carrier) available at the time a long-distance call is made on an outside (CO) line that has Automatic Route Selection (ARS) enabled. In order to use ARS effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers.
74 Feature Guide
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Flowchart]
A long-distance call is made.
A
Is (another) one digit dialled within the ARS
Inter-digit Time?
No
Yes
Each time a digit is dialled, the PBX checks the dialled number (other than Host PBX
Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and
First Carrier Access code).
Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code?
Yes
Reorder tone
Yes
Is the dialled number an
Emergency Call number?
No
No
The dialled number is sent to the telephone company.
Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code?
No
*1
Does the dialled number include the First Carrier
Access code?
No
Checks the Routing Plan Table (1–4) to determine which carrier to use.
*2
Does the leading number match the Route 1–4
Selection Code?
No
Are 7 digits
(other than Host PBX
Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and First Carrier Access code) dialled?
Yes
No
The dialled number is sent to the telephone company.
Yes
Yes
Reorder tone
The dialled number (other than the First Carrier
Access code) is sent to the telephone company.
Yes
*3
Does the leading number match the Route 1–4
Exception Code?
Yes
No
Digits are removed from the dialled number as required.
*4
Digits are added to the dialled number as required.
*5
The corresponding
Routing Plan Table is selected.
*6
Goes to
A
Feature Guide 75
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Programming Procedures]
1.
ARS Mode (
Turn on ARS for each outside (CO) line.
2.
First Carrier Access Code* 1
Enter the carrier's access code, such as the Host PBX Access code (
Carrier Exception code (
Carrier Exception Code [300]), or First Carrier Access code (
Selection Code [359]). For example, if the dialled number is "000-93-425-9477" and the First Carrier
Access code is assigned as "000", the modified number is "93-425-9477". Consult your carrier for more information.
3.
Routing Plan Table
Leading Number*
2
(
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354])
Store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS.
Leading Number Exception* 3 (
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358])
Store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS here.
Note that the Outside (CO) Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here.
Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected via the default carrier for that line.
Removed Number of Digits* 4 (
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360])
There may be circumstances where the user-dialled number must be modified in order for the carrier to connect the call. In this case, store the number of digits to be removed automatically from the beginning of the dialled number here.
Added Number* 5 (
ARS Modification—Added Number [361])
Store the number to be added automatically to the beginning of the dialled number here.
ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*
6
(
When making outside (CO) line calls using the Automatic Line Access number (9/0) * , assign the outside
(CO) line group(s) for each Routing Plan number here.
An outside (CO) line belonging to the assigned outside (CO) line group(s) is automatically seized when making calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the dialled number is applied to one of the
Routing Plan numbers.
Note
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
First
Carrier
Local Call
Second
Carrier
050
(Long-distance Call)
Outside
(CO) Line
PBX
Mobile
Jack
Third
Carrier
05000
(International Call)
1 2
Group 1
3
Group 2
76 Feature Guide
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Programming Example: Routing Plan Table]
Routing
Plan No.
1
2
3
4
Leading
No.*
4,5
9,0
07
6
1
Leading No.
Exception* 2
07
07
Not Stored
Not Stored
Modification
Removed No. of Digits*
3
Added No.*
4
2
0
0
0
050
050
05000
Not Stored
ARS Outside (CO)
Line Group* 5
All
1
1
2
*
1
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]
* 2
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
* 3
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
* 4
ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
* 5
In this example:
Dialled Number
9-43-425-9477
9-54-123-4567
9-93-425-9477
9-04-123-4567
9-07-81-92-477-1450
9-6-123456
Modified Number
050-43-425-9477
Description
A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9".
050-54-123-4567
050-93-425-9477
A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9".
A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2.
050-04-123-4567 A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2.
050-00-81-92-477-1450 An international call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 3.
6-123456 A mobile telephone call via outside (CO) line group 2 is made using Routing Plan 4.
4.
Authorisation Code & Itemised Billing Code Table
Authorisation Code (
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384])
An Authorisation code for each carrier can be assigned for each outside (CO) line, if required by the carrier. The registered codes are not shown on proprietary telephone (PT) displays or System Data
Dump printouts (
System Data Dump [804]) after programming, but "Already Set" will be shown
instead.
Itemised Billing Code (
An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension. It is possible to add the Itemised Billing code assigned to an extension to the Authorisation code for the carrier for each outside (CO) line through system programming (
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]).
Feature Guide 77
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
Sequence of Transmitted Code (
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390])
The sequence of transmitted codes (C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing
Code; H: Telephone Number) can be selected. When "C.I.A.H" is selected, the dialled numbers of
Itemised Billing Code (I) and Authorisation Code (A) are shown on the displays of PTs and SMDR (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
[Programming Example: Authorisation & Itemised Billing Code Table]
Routing
Plan No.
1
2
Leading
No.
8
Modification
Removed
No. of Digits
Added No.
0
5 0
Authorisation
Code*
1
Itemised Billing*
2
11223344 0123456789
(on CO 1/2)
Enable (on CO 1/2)
(Itemised Billing Code:
Extn. 101)
11223344PPPP
#012345
(PPPP: 6 s,
#: Pulse to
Tone Conversion
(
67890123456
789 (on CO 1)
Enable (on CO 1)
(Itemised Billing Code:
Extn. 101)
* 1
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]
* 2
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
In this example:
Dialled Number
9-893-425-9477
(Extn. 101)
9-593-425-9477
(Extn. 101)
Modified Number
Pulse*
1
Tone
11223344-P*
2
-0123456789-101-893-425-9477
Added No.
Authorisation
Code
Itemised
Billing Code
Telephone
No.
Pulse*
1
(
P (Pause)*
2
(
Description
A call via provider access is made using
Routing Plan 1 when the
Automatic Line Access number is assigned to
"9".
The Authorisation code and the Itemised Billing code are transmitted in tone mode.
The pause time is automatically inserted before entering the
Authorisation code.
Pulse Tone
11223344-PPPP-012345-P-67890123456789-101-593-425-9477
Added No.
Authorisation
Code
Itemised
Billing Code
Telephone
No.
A call via provider access is made using
Routing Plan 2 when the
Automatic Line Access number is assigned to
"9".
78 Feature Guide
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
ARS Inter-digit Time
The inter-digit time used while the PBX is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature can be specified through system programming (
•
TRS
TRS checks are performed before ARS number modification, so programme TRS Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)).
• If an extension user makes calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the leading number of a dialled telephone number does not match any entries found in the Leading Number, an outside (CO)
line enabled in Automatic Designated Line Access [419] is automatically seized.
• The PBX checks the number repeatedly until 7 digits have been dialled.
• If an extension user makes an outside (CO) line call by directly pressing a Single-CO (S-CO), Group-
CO (G-CO), or Other-CO (O-CO) button or by dialling an assigned Outside (CO) Line Group Access
number, and the seized outside (CO) line has been enabled in ARS Selection [350], the call is made
with the ARS feature.
Feature Guide 79
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.1 Hands-free Operation
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons automatically activates hands-free mode.
Conditions
•
PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations.
• Hands-free mode is cancelled if an extension user does not start dialling within 10 seconds.
• This feature can be used by pressing the following buttons when the indicator of the SP-PHONE/
MONITOR button is off:
– SP-PHONE button
– MONITOR button
– INTERCOM button
– CO button
User Manual References
1.4.8 Talking to Another Party without Lifting the Handset (Hands-free Operation)
80 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.2 Room Monitor
Description
An extension user can monitor a room or a door through another proprietary telephone (PT) or a doorphone without the destination party knowing.
Conditions
• To monitor using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button or a single line telephone (SLT) with a MUTE button. To be monitored using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
• System programming determines the extensions that can be monitored using this feature (
• A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts (
it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
• Access tones will not be sent to a monitored PT. Paging tones will also not be received by a monitored
PT.
User Manual References
1.7.9 Monitoring a Room (Room Monitor)
Feature Guide 81
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.3 Microphone Mute
Description
During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone to consult privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker.
When Microphone Mute is active, the user can hear the other party's voice, but the user's voice is muted.
Conditions
• This feature is only available on PTs that have an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
User Manual References
1.4.6 Muting a Microphone (Microphone Mute)
82 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.4 Headset Operation
Description
This PBX supports headset-compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset by using an optional headset.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
Conditions
• Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature (
• To set headset mode on a PT, use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the headset.
• If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built- in speaker.
User Manual References
1.4.7 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
Feature Guide 83
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.5 Data Line Security
Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall, and Executive Busy Override. Extensions that have devices such as modems, fax machines, or Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) connected to them may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication.
User Manual References
1.7.6 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
84 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.6 Flash/Recall
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button to disconnect the current call and start another call without hanging up. For example, if this button is used to disconnect an outside (CO) line, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same outside (CO) line.
Conditions
•
FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected through system programming (
a)
MODE 1: EFA mode (
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
An EFA signal is sent for the specified duration (
b)
MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode
A flash/recall signal is sent when the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed if the length of time that the button is pressed is longer than the specified duration (
Flash/Recall Time [418]). If the
length of time that the button is pressed is shorter than the specified duration, an EFA signal will be sent for the specified duration.
• This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode".
•
Disconnect Time
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside (CO) line is programmable for each outside (CO) line (
• Pressing the FLASH/RECALL button restarts the conversation duration, outputs an SMDR call record
(
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature) and checks the Toll Restriction (TRS) class of
service (COS) number again. The notation "F/" will be logged along with the new dial number on SMDR.
Feature Guide 85
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Description
An extension user can access features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Call Waiting. An
EFA (External Feature Access) signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This feature is only available during outside (CO) line calls, including Host PBX Access (
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)).
Conditions
• This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 1: EFA mode" (
current call is placed on consultation hold (
•
Flash/Recall Time
The length of an EFA signal can be selected for each outside (CO) line (
User Manual References
1.8.2 If a Host PBX is Connected
86 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Description
Outside (CO) line calls are limited by the following features:
Feature
Extension-to-Outside (CO)
Line Call Duration
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-
CO) Line Call Duration
Budget Management
Description
When a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration is restricted by a timer (
Line Call Duration [212]). Both parties will hear a warning tone at 5-
second intervals 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected. System programming determines which extensions have calls limited by this feature (
Limitation [613]). This timer applies to outside (CO) line calls that are
made via the PBX.
When a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration is restricted by a timer (
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties
will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
When the total of call charges reaches a specified limit, an extension user hears an alarm (3 sets of 3 beeps) and the user cannot make further outside (CO) line calls. Whether the call is disconnected after the alarm is programmable (
Conditions
•
Lockout
If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, the call between both parties will be disconnected. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before the call is disconnected. No operation is necessary.
• When an extension user seizes an outside (CO) line and then transfers the call to another extension user who can use this feature, the Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration timer starts after the transferred call is answered by the outside party.
• The Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration feature applies to the following calls:
– Calls forwarded by the FWD to Outside (CO) Line feature (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
– Calls transferred by the Call Transfer to Outside (CO) Line feature (
– Calls using the DISA feature (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
– Calls using the Unattended Conference feature (
Feature Guide 87
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Description
Any proprietary telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line telephone (SLT), fax machine, or modem.
When parallel mode is used, the 2 telephones function as follows:
• Both share one extension number.
• Either telephone or device can make or answer calls.
Conditions
• System programming determines the SLTs that can be connected in parallel with a PT (
• When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator on the paired PT will function in the same way as when the PT is in operation.
• The following features cannot be used with an SLT connected in parallel with a PT:
– Call Splitting
– Conference
– Door Open while connected to the doorphone
– External Feature Access (EFA)
– Hot Line
• An SLT connected in parallel with a PT will not ring if the PT is:
– In Hands-free Answerback mode (
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback).
– In Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice) (
• An extension user cannot make a call from the SLT if the PT is:
– Playing background music (BGM)
– Receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker
– In programming mode
• Both the PT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls (if the ringer is turned on).
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is having a call, a 3-party conference call will be established. If one telephone goes on-hook, the other telephone will continue with the call.
Installation Manual References
2.5.2 Connecting Extensions in Parallel
88 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Description
A CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an outside (CO) line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilisation of outside (CO) lines, the PBX monitors each line's status and when a CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone.
Conditions
• CPC Signal Detection is programmable for incoming outside (CO) line calls (
Detection—Incoming [420]) and for outgoing outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal Detection—
• If a CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature (
Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the call will be disconnected.
• It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal from incoming outside (CO) line calls for the duration (
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]) specified through system programming (
Feature Guide 89
1.11 Transferring Features
1.11 Transferring Features
1.11.1 Call Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or to an outside party.
The following features are available:
Feature
With Announcement
Without Announcement
Transferring method
Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination party.
Transfer is completed without an announcement.
After dialling the destination extension number and hearing a ringback tone or busy tone, the originator can replace the handset.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.
Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.
Conditions
• System programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer calls to an outside party (
party.
•
Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
If the transfer destination extension does not answer within a preprogrammed time period (
30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts, the call will be disconnected.
•
Camp-on Transfer for Call Transfer without Announcement
Call Transfer without Announcement is possible while hearing a busy tone, or while hearing a ringback tone after executing Busy Station Signalling (BSS). When the destination extension becomes idle, the transferred call starts ringing automatically at that extension. This is called Camp-on Transfer.
•
One-touch Transfer
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console users and proprietary telephone (PT) users can hold an outside
(CO) line call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly (
Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]).
A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can also be customised as a DSS button.
• Music, if available, is sent to the held outside party while the call is being transferred (
through system programming (
•
Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
If an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an outside party, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer (
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds
before the timer expires (
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). The extension that transferred
the call will also hear a ring tone or an alarm tone 50 seconds before the timer expires (
Hold). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected unless the extension joins the conversation
again.
• If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.
90 Feature Guide
1.11 Transferring Features
•
Consultation Hold
When a transferring party presses the TRANSFER button on a PT or the Recall/hookswitch on an SLT, the transferred party is automatically placed on consultation hold (
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Feature Guide 91
1.12 Holding Features
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.1 Call Hold
Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Call Hold features are available:
Feature
General Call Hold
Exclusive Call Hold
Description
Any extension user can retrieve a held call.
Only the proprietary telephone (PT) user who held the call can retrieve it.
Pressing the HOLD button multiple times alternates between General and Exclusive Call Hold.
Conditions
• Using the Call Hold feature, a PT user can have one intercom call and multiple outside (CO) line calls on hold at the same time. To hold multiple intercom calls, the user should use the Call Park feature (
intercom call or one outside (CO) line call on hold. To hold multiple calls, the user should use the Call
Park feature.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, the call is automatically disconnected.
•
Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the outside party on hold (
1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio
source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming (
• Doorphone calls cannot be put on hold.
•
Hold Recall
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (
Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring
tone will be heard at the extension that put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If the hold recall time is set to "Disable", no tone will be heard. Going off-hook after the hold recall time has expired automatically re-establishes the conversation with the call on hold.
•
SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT, if the length of time that the Recall/ hookswitch is pressed is shorter than a specified duration (
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]).
The following methods (
SLT Hold Mode [104]) are available:
Mode
Hold-1
Hold
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Going on-hook
Transfer to Extension
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Extension No.
92 Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
Mode
Hold-2
Hold-3
Hold
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Call Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Call Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Transfer to Extension
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Call Hold Feature No.
+
Extension No.
In some cases, a call is not disconnected when an SLT user goes on-hook. Instead, the call is mistakenly placed on hold. After a specified time expires, the Hold Recall tone is heard. When the SLT user answers this, the user hears a cyclic tone (like a reorder tone). To avoid this problem, select "Hold-
2" or "Hold-3". In either of these modes, all calls are disconnected when going on-hook, unless the Call
Hold feature number is entered after pressing the Recall/hookswitch.
It is possible to set each SLT not to receive pulse signals through system programming (
for hooking, in the countries/areas where the length of time that the Recall/hookswitch is pressed is set
to "MODE 1: 50–180 ms" in Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207].
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.4.2 Holding a Call
Feature Guide 93
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.2 Call Park
Description
An extension user can hold a call by placing it into a common parking zone of the PBX. A parked call can be retrieved by any extension user. This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone (PT), or more than one intercom call or outside (CO) line call with a single line telephone (SLT).
Conditions
•
Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (
Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring
tone will be heard at the extension that parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
•
Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied, the extension user will hear a busy tone. While hearing a busy tone, the user can retry by selecting another parking zone.
User Manual References
1.4.2 Holding a Call
94 Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.3 Call Splitting
Description
An extension user can speak alternately with 2 parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to speak with the other party.
Conditions
• This feature does not apply to calls from doorphones or paging announcements.
•
Consultation Hold
When the extension user presses the HOLD button on a proprietary telephone (PT) or the Recall/ hookswitch on a single line telephone (SLT), the held party is automatically placed on consultation hold
(
User Manual References
1.4.3 Talking to 2 Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Feature Guide 95
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.4 Music on Hold
Description
An outside party on hold will hear audio to inform the party that the call is still on hold.
The following types of audio are available depending on the user's country/area:
a)
Internal audio source
b)
External audio source
c)
Tone
The audio sources (internal and external) can also be used for BGM (
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)).
Conditions
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio source.
• The audio can be selected through system programming (
• Operations such as Call Hold (
1.12.1 Call Hold) and Call Transfer (
1.11.1 Call Transfer) activate
Music on Hold.
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
96 Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.5 Consultation Hold
Description
When an extension user is on a call and performs Call Transfer (
1.11.1 Call Transfer), Call Splitting (
1.12.3 Call Splitting), or tries to establish a conference call (
1.13.1.2 Conference), the call is
automatically placed on consultation hold. When the operation is completed or cancelled, the consultation hold is released.
Feature Guide 97
1.13 Conference Features
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1 Conference Features
1.13.1.1 Conference Features—OVERVIEW
Description
The following features are available to establish a conference call:
Feature
Conference
Executive Busy Override
Description
An extension user can establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call.
Details in
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call.
98 Feature Guide
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1.2 Conference
Description
An extension user can establish a conference call. The following Conference features are available:
Feature
3-party Conference
5-party Conference
Description
During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to the conversation, thereby establishing a 3-party conference call.
Unattended Conference:
The proprietary telephone (PT) user who originated a conference with 2 outside parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference at any time, if he or she desires.
A PT user can establish a 3-party to 5-party conference call by entering the 5-party Conference feature number.
Conditions
[General]
•
Conference call arrangement
The following configurations of 3-party or 5-party conference calls are possible at the same time through system programming (
– 3-party conference calls between 3 extensions: Up to 3
– 3-party conference calls between one extension and 2 outside parties: Up to 4
– 3-party conference calls between 2 extensions and one outside party: Up to 4
– 5-party conference call with up to 5 extensions or with a combination of extensions and up to 2 outside parties: One
•
Conference Button
On a PT that does not have a CONF (Conference) button, a flexible CO button can be customised as a Conference button.
•
Consultation Hold
When an extension user tries to establish a conference call, the current call is automatically placed on consultation hold until the conference is established (
[3-party Conference]
• A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 2-party conference call is changed to a 3-party conference call. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
•
Unattended Conference Recall
The duration of unattended conferences is restricted by a system timer (
A ring tone or an alarm tone is heard at the conference originator's extension 50 seconds before the timer expires.
A warning tone starts to be heard by parties in the unattended conference 15 seconds before the timer expires.
If the originator returns to the conference before the unattended conference call is disconnected, the timer will be cancelled. If not, the ring tone or alarm tone and the warning tone will continue to be heard until the unattended conference call is disconnected (
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
Feature Guide 99
1.13 Conference Features
• An unattended conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party through system programming (
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]).
[5-party Conference]
• The following features will not function during a 5-party conference call:
– Call Hold
– Call Park
– Call Splitting
– Call Transfer
– Executive Busy Override
– Unattended Conference
• A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 5-party conference call is established and when a 5-party conference call is changed to a 4-party conference call or vice versa. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.4.5 Talking to Multiple Parties (Conference)
100 Feature Guide
1.14 Paging Features
1.14 Paging Features
1.14.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a paging announcement to several people at once.
The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external pager (loudspeaker), depending on the type of Paging that is performed as follows:
All Extensions
External
Group
Type
All Extensions & External
Paging method
The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs.
The page is heard through an external pager.
The page is heard through the built-in speakers of the PTs that belong to a certain extension group (
The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs and an external pager simultaneously.
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.
Paging Deny
It is possible for each extension to deny being paged.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager.
• A confirmation tone will be sent to the external pager before the paging announcement. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
External Pager Access Tone [106]).
• Only one person can use this feature at a time.
• Extensions that cannot be paged are:
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in DND mode (
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
User Manual References
1.6.1 Paging
1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
Feature Guide 101
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Description
A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone.
Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature (
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: An optional doorphone, and doorphone card.
• When an optional 4-port doorphone card is installed in the PBX, doorphones 1 and 2 (or doorphones
3 and 4) cannot be used at the same time. When one is in use, the user cannot have a conversation with the other.
• A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts. If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
•
Ring Duration
If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (
Ring Time [708]), ringing stops and the call is cancelled.
An extension user can choose the preferred ring tone pattern for doorphone calls through system programming (
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]).
•
Call Destination
System programming determines the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for each time service mode (
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]).
•
Door Open
While on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in (
• When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone (PT), a tone is heard instead of ringing.
Installation Manual References
2.3.6 2-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82460)
2.3.7 4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82461)
2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
102 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.2 Door Open
Description
Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed through system programming to unlock the door for each time service mode (
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]). While on a doorphone call,
any extension user can unlock a door to let a visitor in (
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door, optional doorphone, and doorphone card.
• A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed.
•
Door Open Duration
An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time (
Installation Manual References
2.3.6 2-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82460)
2.3.7 4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82461)
2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers
User Manual References
1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
Feature Guide 103
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
Description
Extension users can choose how their telephones receive doorphone calls, by selecting to hear ringing, a chime, or both, provided a doorbell/door chime connected to a door opener is connected to the PBX. They can recognise which doorphone is ringing by selecting a different doorphone chime pattern for each doorphone.
[Programming Example]
In order for an extension connected to extension jack 01 (extension 101) to be able to receive a doorphone call from a doorbell/door chime connected to Relay 4, programme as follows:
Programming
Doorphone Ringing*
1
1
Enable (extn.
101)
Doorphone
2
Enable (extn.
101)
3
Enable (extn.
101)
Enable (extn.
101)
4
Doorphone Ring/Chime* 2
Doorphone Chime
Assignment*
3
Doorphone Chime Pattern* 4
Chime
Relay 4
Pattern 1
Chime
Relay 4
Chime
Relay 4
Chime
Relay 4
Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4
* 1
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
* 2
* 3
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
* 4
In this example
When a visitor presses the Call button of Doorphone 2:
– A doorbell/door chime, connected to Relay 4, chimes with Pattern 2.
– Because Doorphone Ring/Chime is set to "Chime", extension 101 does not ring.
– The extension user who is allowed to receive a call from Doorphone 2 can answer the doorphone call by going off-hook within a preprogrammed time period (
Doorphone Ring Time [708]). If the
user is allowed to unlock the door (
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]), he or she can
then unlock the door by entering the Door Open feature number.
– If the called extension is busy and has set Call Waiting, the extension user hears a call waiting tone and the call information flashes on the display.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied doorbell/door chime connected to each door opener.
Installation Manual References
2.7 Connecting Doorbell or Door Chime
104 Feature Guide
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.15 Optional Device Features
Feature Guide 105
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle.
Conditions
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external audio device, such as a CD player or radio for
External audio source.
• The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook, receiving a call, or receiving a paging announcement.
• The audio can be selected through system programming (
• This feature can be turned on and off by dialling "1" while the extension is on-hook and idle, if BGM is enabled through system programming (
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
User Manual References
1.7.5 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
106 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
Description
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the following features:
Feature
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Usage Details in
When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear a DISA OGM.
3-level Automated Attendant
(AA)
When the DISA AA service is active, the caller will hear a DISA OGM. The DISA AA service supports up to 3 levels of DISA OGMs.
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)
When a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions in the group are busy, the caller will hear a UCD OGM
(
Conditions
• This feature functions differently from personal/common BV OGMs used by the BV feature (
• To use this feature, "DISA" or "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside
(CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
• The operator or manager can record a maximum of 32 messages (8 messages for DISA/UCD and 24 messages for 3-level AA). When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is added, up to 2 messages can be played simultaneously for callers, and the total recording time of the PBX is increased from 3 to 6 minutes.
• After recording messages, the operator or manager can also play them back for confirmation. In addition, the operator or manager can erase messages for DISA/UCD.
• When the operator or manager tries to record or play back a message, he or she will hear an alarm tone if the message channel is in use.
• Prerecorded messages will not be cleared by a system restart. To clear them, use system programming
(
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]).
Installation Manual References
2.3.8 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491)
User Manual References
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide 107
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows outside callers to be connected to their desired PBX destinations without the use of the operator. Callers can listen to a DISA outgoing message (OGM) instructing them as to which numbers to dial to be connected to the person or department they would like to speak with. DISA can also give PBX users access to PBX features, such as making outside (CO) line calls, when they are outside the office.
This DISA OGM can guide callers and allow them to:
• Call an extension by dialling the extension number.
• Call another outside party via the outside (CO) lines of the PBX.
• Access the desired extension simply by dialling a single-digit number (DISA Automated Attendant
[AA] number) using DISA AA service.
DISA OGM
When a call arrives on a DISA line, callers will hear a DISA OGM or a short beep. When the DISA AA service is active, this DISA OGM will direct callers to dial the appropriate digit (DISA AA number) to be connected to a specified destination. To access other PBX features, such as making intercom or outside (CO) line calls, the caller may dial the appropriate numbers while the DISA OGM is playing.
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record a DISA OGM (
DISA AA Service
DISA AA service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (DISA AA number) and be connected to the desired party automatically. The PBX can store up to 10 destinations that can be called by dialling a DISA
AA number (0–9) for each DISA OGM (
DISA Built-in AA [501]). These destinations can be an extension
number (
Extension Number [009]), an extension group number (
Extension Group [600]), or the DISA
AA number of a 3-level DISA OGM (
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]).
During or after the DISA OGM announcement (
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or after a short beep
(
OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").
Each DISA AA number directs the call to a preprogrammed location.
Since DISA AA numbers are single digits, if the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (
DISA AA Wait Time [517]), DISA AA service will be bypassed because the PBX will assume the
caller is trying to access a specific feature.
When the DISA AA service is used, Incoming Dial Mode must be set to "With AA" through system programming (
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). When "With AA" is selected, the PBX regards caller-
dialled digits "0" through "9" as DISA AA numbers. If no destination is assigned to "9" or "0", the PBX regards the number (9/0)
*
as the Automatic Line Access number (
Automatic Line Access [121]) or Operator Call
number.
Note
*
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
108 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Programming Example: 1-level (DISA) AA Table]
In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith (extension 102) using 1-level (DISA) AA, programme as follows:
Outside (CO) Line No.
1, 2
3–8
Day
DISA OGM1
Normal
Distribution method* 1
Lunch
DISA OGM1
Normal
Night
DISA OGM1
Normal
0
–
1
Mike
Smith
(102)
2
Extn.
103
3
DISA AA No. for 1-level AA*
2
Extn.
104
4
Extn.
105
5
Extn.
106
6
Extn.
107
7
Extn.
108
8
Extn.
Group 1
9
–
*
1
*
2
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
[Programming Example: 3-level AA Table]
In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith of the Software Support Team (extension 102) using 3level AA, programme as follows:
Outside (CO) Line No.
1–4
5–8
Day
DISA OGM1
Normal
Distribution method* 1
Lunch
DISA OGM2
Normal
Night
DISA OGM3
Normal
Feature Guide 109
1.15 Optional Device Features
1-level AA
0
–
1 2 3
Extn.
Group 1
Extn.
Group 2
2-level
AA
*
3
DISA AA No.*
2
4 5 6
– – –
7
–
8
–
9
–
2-level AA
0
–
1 2 3
Extn.
Group 3
3-level
AA
*
5
Extn.
Group 4
DISA AA No.*
4
4 5 6
– – –
3-level AA
0
Extn.
101
1
Mike
Smith
(102)
*
6
2
–
3
–
DISA AA No.*
4
4
–
5
–
6
–
*
1
*
2
*
3
*
4
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
2-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for AA number "3" in DISA Built-in AA [501]
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
* 5
3-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA number "
in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
*
6 Mike Smith (102): Select "Jack 02" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA
number 1" in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
In this example:
1)
After or while listening to the AA first-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Service. Press 3 to speak to Support."), caller dials a DISA AA number, "3", as directed by the DISA OGM.
2)
Next, the AA second-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Hardware Team. Press 2 to speak to Software Team.") directs the caller to dial another DISA AA number. The caller dials "2".
3)
Finally, the AA third-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Mike Smith. Press 0 to speak to the Operator.") directs the caller to dial a DISA AA number, "1", to be connected to a specified destination, extension 102.
Note
When the type of a destination from 2–level AA or 3–level AA to another setting is changed, any associated DISA OGM will also be cleared. In addition, any items within the AA menu being removed will also be removed.
110 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
DISA Busy Mode
If the destination of a DISA call is busy, the call will be redirected to an idle extension (
[100]) in the destination's idle extension hunting group (
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). If no extension in
the group is available, or if the destination of the DISA call is not a member of an idle extension hunting group, the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming (
a)
Disconnect: The caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
b)
Call Waiting: The called extension hears a call waiting tone if the extension has set Call Waiting.
c)
DISA: The following procedure is performed:
1)
If the assigned DISA OGM (busy message) has been recorded, the caller hears the DISA
OGM (e.g., "The party you called is unavailable..."). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded, the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
2)
After the busy message has been played, the DISA OGM that was sent before the busy message is sent to the caller again.
3)
The PBX waits for the caller to enter a new destination. In this case, the PBX does not accept any Outside (CO) Line Access number regardless of the security type.
If the destination is a member of a DISA ring group, DISA Busy Mode will not function for the call. The PBX regards it as unanswered.
DISA Intercept Mode
If the destination of a DISA call does not answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (
programming (
a)
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
b)
Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
This is useful for business calls. For example, the call can be forwarded to the operator, a Voice
Processing System (VPS) or Built-in Voice Message (BV) automatically.
DISA No Dial Mode
If the PBX does not receive either DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals or a fax (CNG) tone within a preprogrammed time period (
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or if the PBX does not receive DTMF
signals within a preprogrammed time period (
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the call will be
handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming (
a)
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
b)
Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
DISA Security Mode
Security can be enabled for the PBX to control the types of calls that can be made by callers using DISA.
When the DISA security mode is set to "All Security" or "Trunk Security" (
caller is required to enter a DISA security code (
DISA Security Code [512]) before making intercom and
outside (CO) line calls, or outside (CO) line calls only, respectively. The DISA security code and the number of digits required for the DISA security code (
DISA Security Code Digits [530]) can be assigned by the
manager. After entering a DISA security code, if the code is the same as one of the preprogrammed security codes, the caller will hear a short beep. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]).
If the DISA security code is entered incorrectly 3 times when using DISA, a reorder tone will be sent to the caller and the call will be disconnected.
Feature Guide 111
1.15 Optional Device Features
Security Mode
All Security
Trunk Security
No Security
Intercom Calls Outside (CO) Line Calls
Permitted
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Calls through DISA
DISA callers can use DISA to make outside (CO) line calls when allowed by the DISA security mode.
If a call between 2 outside parties is established via DISA, the length of the call can be limited to a preprogrammed duration (
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A timer will activate when the call is
connected, and a warning tone will be heard 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected (
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection can be assigned through system programming (
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420], CPC Signal
112 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside party is received.
(DISA Delayed Answer Time expires)
One short beep
A number is dialled.
Is a security code required?
No
No
The PBX answers the call.
(DISA OGM Mute Time expires)
Yes
Is the assigned
DISA OGM recorded?
(Intercept Time for Internal DISA expires)
Yes
One short beep
The security code is entered.
The code is correct.
DISA OGM
A
Nothing is dialled.
What is the security mode?
Trunk or No
Is Intercept Routing employed?
Yes
No
(DISA Wait Timer after OGM expires)
Cyclic tone,
CPC signal
Fax (CNG) tone
All
The call is disconnected.
The call is sent to the fax extension.
Busy tone
Goes to C
The call is disconnected.
Make an outside
(CO) line call.
The call reaches the destination.
The code is incorrect.
Reorder tone
The call is established.
The call is established.
(DISA Ring Time before
Intercept expires)
The call is not answered.
The call is disconnected.
The destination extension(s) is(are) busy.
B
The call is not answered for
40 seconds.
Is Intercept Routing employed?
Yes No
What is the DISA
Busy Mode?
C
Disconnect
Busy tone
Call Waiting DISA
Is DISA IRNA to BV assigned?
No
Yes The call is disconnected.
BV is answered.
The call is sent to another extension.
The call is established.
(DISA Ring Time after
Intercept expires)
(DISA Ring Time
before Intercept expires)
A busy DISA
OGM is heard.
The call is not answered.
Goes to
A
Goes to
B
The call is disconnected.
The call is established.
The call is not answered.
The call is disconnected.
Feature Guide 113
1.15 Optional Device Features
Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO)
Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a)
Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b)
Maintaining the secrecy of passwords.
c)
Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
d)
Changing passwords regularly.
• The maximum recording time of each message is 3 minutes.
• The preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card can play only one message at a time and the total recording time of the PBX for DISA/UCD OGMs is 3 minutes. When an optional message expansion card for
DISA/UCD OGMs is added, up to 2 messages can be played simultaneously for callers, and the total recording time of the PBX is increased to 6 minutes.
• To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
•
DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the DISA Delayed Answer time (
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]) so that the
caller will hear a ringback tone for a preprogrammed length of time before hearing a DISA OGM or a short beep.
•
Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line
When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party, the caller is not required to enter a DISA security code regardless of the security mode.
•
DISA OGM Mute Time
Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with DISA, the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time (
OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is
connected. After the DISA OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the
DISA OGM begins playing or a short beep is sent.
•
SMDR
The following are logged by SMDR for DISA calls (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording
– The destination of the DISA call
– DISA security code status
•
Call Deny
System programming determines which extensions can receive DISA calls (
a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. If a DISA call is received by a DISA ring group, this programme does not function for extensions in that DISA ring group and these extensions will still ring.
•
Cyclic Tone Detection
It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent
(
Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside-to-
outside (CO-to-CO) line call via DISA.
•
Fax Connection
System programming determines the extensions that are able to receive fax data when the PBX receives a fax (CNG) tone via the DISA feature (
FAX Connection [503]). The preprogrammed
extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
114 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
•
Fax Tone Detection
It is possible to select the number of times the fax (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent before the PBX recognises the incoming signal as fax data (
FAX Tone Detection [514]). If the
DISA OGM is short (0–5 s), in some cases the fax (CNG) tone may not be detected. In this case, it is recommended to set the length of time the PBX continues to search for a fax (CNG) tone after completing a DISA OGM to "10 s" or "15 s" through system programming (
OGM [505]). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded, it is recommended to set the length of
time to "6 s" or "9 s" through system programming (
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]).
• It is programmable whether a ringback tone (
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]) or Music on Hold (
Music on Hold [111]) is sent to the caller when a DISA call is received (
Installation Manual References
2.3.8 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491)
Feature Guide References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
User Manual References
1.2.7 Accessing Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
3.3.1 Programming Information
Feature Guide 115
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Description
If an optional voice message card is installed in the PBX, a caller can leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or the PBX's common message area. Information on the recorded messages is automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, where it can be viewed later or used to play back the original message (
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). The optional voice message card has 2 voice
message resources (Built-in Voice Message [BV] resource 1 and BV resource 2), and every extension must belong to one of these resources based on system programming (
Extension users other than the operator or manager can access the following options:
– Personal BV outgoing messages (OGMs)
– Personal voice messages (left by callers via Call Forwarding [FWD] or Direct Message)
Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by that extension's user.
The operator or manager can access the following options:
– Personal BV OGMs for the operator or manager
– Personal voice messages (left by callers via FWD or Direct Message for the operator or manager)
– Common BV OGMs for the company
– Common voice messages (left by callers for the company)
Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by the operator or manager only.
Up to 125 voice messages with a total recording time of 60 minutes (
BV Total Recording Time [807]) can
be logged per BV resource. All personal/common message areas within each BV resource share the total space of the resource. For example, in BV resource 1, if the common message area currently has 10 messages, totalling 10 minutes, the personal and common message areas can jointly store up to 115 messages or 50 minutes.
[Example: Pattern A]
BV Resource 1
Operator or Manager
(Extn. 101)
Common
Message Area
• Common BV OGM
• Common Voice
Message
Extn. 102
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Extn. 103
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
BV Resource 2
Extn. 124
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice
Messages)
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
116 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Example: Pattern B]
BV Resource 1
Operator or Manager
(Extn. 101)
Common
Message Area
• Common BV OGM
• Common Voice
Message
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Extn. 102
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
BV Resource 2
Extn. 124
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice
Messages)
[Example: Pattern C]
BV Resource 1
Manager
(Extn. 101)
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Extn. 112
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
Operator
(Extn. 113)
Common
Message Area
• Common BV OGM
• Common Voice
Message
BV Resource 2
Extn. 124
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice
Messages)
If there are new voice messages in a user's personal message area or the common message area (if accessible), the user will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 4) when going off-hook. In addition, if that user's telephone has a MESSAGE button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light
Feature Guide 117
1.15 Optional Device Features
when a message has been left. A MESSAGE button can be used to listen to the message after the user goes off-hook. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button on a display proprietary telephone (PT) while on-hook shows voice message information.
The BV feature allows users to also perform the following operations:
• If outside (CO) line calls are preprogrammed to be automatically directed to a common message area (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), or if Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
calls are preprogrammed to be redirected to a common message area via Intercept Routing (
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]), the caller will hear a common BV OGM and can
leave a voice message directly in the common message area.
[Programming Example]
Outside (CO)
Line No.
1
2
(Cont.) :
:
8
Distribution method* 1
Day
BV01* 3
Night
BV02* 3
Lunch Day
DISA IRNA to BV*
Night
2
Lunch
BV02* 3
Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored
Normal
BV20*
3
BV21*
3 Not Stored DISA
OGM3
:
DISA
OGM4
:
:
Normal
:
Normal
: : : :
: : : :
Normal Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored
*
*
1
2
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Note
This feature functions only when "DISA" is selected as the distribution method for the corresponding outside (CO) line port.
* 3
BVxx (xx=01–24): Common BV OGM number followed by the Common BV OGM feature number "722"
In this example:
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a)
In day mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV01") for BV distribution is assigned.
The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area.
b)
In night/lunch mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV02") for BV distribution is assigned. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area.
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 2:
a)
In day mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM3") for DISA distribution and the common BV OGM to be played ("BV20") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via
Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area.
b)
In night mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM4") for DISA distribution and the common BV OGM to be played ("BV21") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call
118 Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via
Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area.
• An extension user can set incoming calls to be forwarded to his or her personal message area, when he or she cannot answer them. If an incoming call, direct to the user's extension, or a call using the DISA AA service (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), is forwarded to the
user's personal message area, the caller will hear a personal BV OGM and can leave a voice message.
•
Direct Message feature
An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the personal message area of another extension, even if the extension has not been set to forward incoming calls to its personal message area, or even if no personal BV OGM has been recorded. When a caller leaves a voice message using this feature, the voice message is automatically linked to the caller information (including the extension number and name [if stored]) in the Incoming Call Log.
• An extension user can play and/or erase voice messages from the user's extension. In addition, a user or the operator/manager can remotely play and/or erase voice messages through an outside
(CO) line. The relevant voice message area is accessed by entering a preprogrammed voice message access code (
BV Access Code through CO Line [625]) while hearing a personal/
common BV OGM or DISA OGM.
Note
If the Voice Mail Integration feature has been set, the BV feature will not function.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: An optional voice message card.
• The BV feature does not use OGMs for DISA/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) on either the preinstalled
DISA/UCD OGM card or the optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs (if present) (
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD).
• When an extension that belongs to BV resource 1 or BV resource 2 is reassigned to the other resource, the voice messages that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased, but the personal/common BV
OGMs are not erased.
• Each resource can only be accessed by one extension at a time. When the resource an extension is assigned to is being used by another extension, the extension cannot use that resource, even if the other resource is available.
• The PBX can record a maximum of 125 voice messages per resource. The maximum recording time of each voice message (
BV Recording Time [214]) and the total recording time of the PBX (
Total Recording Time [807]) are programmable. The maximum recording time of each personal/
common BV OGM (
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]) is also programmable.
• System programming determines the extension users that can use this feature (
• If a voice message channel (resource) is in use when an outside caller tries to leave a voice message, he or she will hear a ringback tone. The caller will hear a personal/common BV OGM as soon as a channel becomes available. Up to 8 outside (CO) line calls can be placed in a queue as they arrive.
• If a user performs System Data Clear by selecting "All para" through system programming (
Data Clear [999]), all voice messages except for personal/common BV OGMs are erased. To erase all
voice messages and personal/common BV OGMs at once, initialise the voice message card through system programming (
BV Card Initialisation [808]).
• Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication—Personal button or a Caller ID
Indication—Common button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged.
Feature Guide 119
1.15 Optional Device Features
• When the remaining recording time for the PBX is less than 5 minutes, the display informs both the extension users within the same resource and the manager that the voice message resource is full, and the users will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 5) when going off-hook. If the remaining recording time goes back to being 5 minutes or more, for example, when messages are erased, the display returns to the idle status display and the users will hear another dial tone instead of dial tone 5 when going offhook.
• If the FWD feature is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is the BV feature number (
Call Forwarding Selection [963]) and the extension has been assigned as "Normal" (
Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and
the extension will not ring, even if the user has set the FWD feature. If FWD is disabled, outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will ring.
• Only the operator or the manager can access the common message area (including common BV
OGM). The operator has higher priority than the manager as follows:
– When the operator extension is reassigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal
BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The new operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM.
– When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is newly assigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the manager) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV
OGM.
– When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is deleted, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. In this case, the manager can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM.
• A voice message area cannot be included as a member of a conference call.
• Even if a caller does not leave a voice message in either the personal or common message area, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV OGM, the information is still logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (common or personal area) and displayed by SMDR (
Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
•
Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time
Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with BV, the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time (
OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is connected.
After the Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the personal/common BV OGM begins playing.
• A PT user can listen to voice messages by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number.
Installation Manual References
2.3.9 2-Channel Voice Message Card (KX-TE82492)
Feature Guide References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
User Manual References
1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV])
2.1.6 Recording, Playing, or Erasing Common BV Outgoing Messages
120 Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features
1.16 Caller ID Features
1.16.1 Caller ID
Description
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs) as well as some single line telephones (SLTs) when receiving calls. Additionally, Caller ID information is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension that received the call, allowing the caller to view a record of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later.
The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller's telephone number when it is received by, for example, adding an Outside (CO) Line Access number or adding/deleting certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically. This allows an extension user to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call log without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
Notes
• The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Guide refers to features that can receive caller information sent from the telephone company and received on outside (CO) lines. Your network provider may use a different name for this type of service.
• To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming (
• Caller ID signalling type, FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) (Bell 202 or V.23) or DTMF (Dual Tone
Multi-Frequency), can be selected to match the type used by your telephone company through system programming (
Caller ID Display on SLT
This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with either FSK-type Caller ID or DTMF-type Caller ID.
Notes
• This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)-type FSK and Bellcore-type FSK.
• This feature does not comply with methods using DT-AS signal or line reversal signal.
1.
Caller ID-Related Feature
Feature
Incoming Call Log
Description Details in
Caller ID information is automatically recorded in the call log of the extension that received the call.
This information can be used to view a record of incoming calls or make calls to any number in the call log.
2.
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition
When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX can add "0" *1 to the caller's telephone number as a leading number if it does not begin with "0", through system programming (
*1 For New Zealand, "0" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length of a telephone number is 8 or 9 digits, and "00" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length is 10 digits or more.
Feature Guide 121
1.16 Caller ID Features
3.
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
When Caller ID information is checked, the PBX can automatically modify the caller's telephone number according to a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number allows the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
[Programming Example: Caller ID Modification Table]
Call Type
Local Call*
2
Long-distance Call*
3
Code No.
Area Code* 1
1
2
(Cont.) :
5
:
[Not programmable]
212
011
:
:
Removed No. of
Digits
3
3
:
:
0
Added No.
Not Stored
001
:
:
1
*
1
*
2
*
3
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
122 Feature Guide
<Modification Flowchart>
An outside (CO) line call containing
Caller ID information is received.
Yes Is the caller's area code stored in the Caller ID Modification Table?
No
1.16 Caller ID Features
Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the corresponding
"Local Call" field.
Example:
Removed number of digits: 3
Added number: blank
Example:
Received number:
201 555 1234
Modified number:
555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the "Long-distance
Call" field.
Example:
Removed number of digits: 0
Added number: 1
Example:
Received number: 313 555 1234
Modified number: 1 313 555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
4.
Displaying the Caller's Name
When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller's name in the following order, then show that name on the display.
1)
The System Speed Dialling Table
2)
The Caller ID information received from the telephone company
If a caller's name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed.
Conditions
[General]
• Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.
[Caller ID Display on SLT]
•
Caller ID Display on SLT feature applies to:
Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls.
Intercom calls include forwarded calls, calls from Transfer Recall and Hold Recall.
Outside (CO) line calls include calls directed to Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) or Direct Inward System
Feature Guide 123
1.16 Caller ID Features
Access (DISA) ring groups, forwarded calls, intercepted calls, or calls from extensions that placed outside (CO) line calls on consultation hold.
• SLT Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming (
• Each SLT (including an SLT connected in parallel with a PT) can be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming (
• When the caller's telephone number is sent to an SLT, an Outside (CO) Line Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming (
Access Number [151]), to be used when calling the caller back.
• If a call is transferred, forwarded, or intercepted via Intercept Routing to an SLT, the original caller's information will be shown on the SLT.
• During a conversation, Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT.
• When FSK-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 20 digits), name
(max. 16 characters), date and time, or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information such as
"Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number exceeds 20 digits, the SLT receives only the first 20 digits. If the caller's name exceeds 16 characters, the SLT receives only the first 16 characters.
• When DTMF-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits) or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits. However, when a value less than
"1500 ms" is set through system programming (
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), the SLT receives only
the first 10 digits.
• Depending on the type of SLT being used, caller names and the dates and times that calls were received may not be able to be shown on the SLT.
• If an outside caller disconnects a call to an SLT on which the call's Caller ID information is displayed, and the SLT receives another outside (CO) line call directly after, the SLT will wait until a preprogrammed time has passed (
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]) before it starts to ring,
and the new caller's Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. A certain amount of time may be required between calls for an SLT to receive Caller ID information correctly.
• To enable the Caller ID feature, it may be necessary to set the same ring tone pattern (
Bell Pattern [629]) as used by the telephone company.
• When an SLT is programmed to receive Caller ID information, the ringing of calls with Caller ID on that
SLT is delayed for a few seconds. Therefore, the length of time before calls are forwarded or intercepted, and the length of time that intercepted calls ring at the destination SLT, may be slightly shorter than the duration specified through system programming.
Installation Manual References
2.3.5 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493)
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
124 Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Description
When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller's identity.
This information is also automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back.
There are 2 types of call log areas available in the PBX. One is the personal area, which stores logs of calls received by each extension when a call arrives at a certain proprietary telephone (PT).
The other is the common area, which stores a log of calls arriving at multiple PTs or via the Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) Intercept Routing feature. Caller ID information can be logged by the following methods:
• Logged automatically when no one answers calls.
• Logged automatically if an extension user presets logging of the caller's information when answering calls.
• Logged manually by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during a conversation.
• Logged automatically when a caller leaves a voice message (
[Example]
If the information is stored in record "002",
002:JOHN WHITE
--- Caller's name
002: 0011223344
--- Caller's number
002: May15 10:23A
--- Date and time of call
New:002 Old:001
--- Status* & number of logged calls
Caller ID Indication buttons
Personal
Common
Caller ID Selection buttons
Personal
Common
* "New" is displayed for call records that have not previously been viewed;
"Old" is displayed for call records that have previously been viewed.
Both new and old call records are stored in each personal and common area.
Conditions
•
Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button, and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension, as shown below.
Red on
Off
Light pattern Status of the corresponding call log
There are new call records since the last time the call log was viewed.
There are no new call records in the call log, or the call log has been already viewed.
Feature Guide 125
1.16 Caller ID Features
The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button will alert an extension user to any missed
(unanswered) calls.
The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button is also used to store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and to view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller.
If a Caller ID Indication—Common button is not assigned to any PT, the calls will be logged in the personal area of the PT that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack, and its Caller ID Indication—
Personal button light will turn red.
•
Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button. The Caller
ID Selection—Personal/Common button is used to display the number of logged calls while on-hook, to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, and to inform an extension user that the personal or common area call log is full. The user may also change the displayed information by pressing the "#" key instead of the Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information.
• It is programmable whether the user can view call logs stored in the common area or not (
Area Call Log Check [909]). If this programme is enabled, the Caller ID Indication—Common button
and Caller ID Selection—Common button can be assigned.
•
Incoming Call Log Memory
The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited (
ID Selection—Personal/Common button light will turn red. When a caller leaves a voice message, it is automatically linked to the Caller ID information in the Incoming Call Log. Up to 125 voice messages per BV resource are stored separately from the Incoming Call Logs mentioned above.
It is possible for an extension user (or the operator/manager) to select whether the oldest call in the personal area (or common area) will be replaced each time a call is received, or whether the new call information will be discarded, by entering the 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (or 301st
Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area) feature number.
Caller records for all call logs of an extension are numbered sequentially as they are received, regardless of which call log the information is stored in. For example, information on the first call received will be stored as record "001" (e.g., 001, logged in the personal area) and information on the second call received will be stored as record "002" (e.g., 002, logged in the common area), whether it is logged in the personal area, common area, or BV.
If the call log in the personal area becomes full when the 21st call (e.g., 110, logged in the personal area) has been set to overwrite the oldest call (001, logged in the personal area),
– The oldest call will be deleted and subsequent records will be moved one number down, if the 21st call is unanswered or if it is answered but has different information from the 20th call.
– The 21st call will be discarded and the previous call information will stay as it is, if the 21st call is answered and has the same information as the 20th call.
Common area call logs function in the same way.
• If a transferred call (unscreened) is not answered, the information is logged in the personal area of the final destination.
• Regardless of the telephone type being used, the recorded voice message is associated with the caller's information.
• Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication—Personal button or a Caller ID
Indication—Common button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged.
•
Incoming Call Log Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log (including associated voice messages) stored in his or her personal area, preventing other users from viewing its contents (
operator or manager can cancel the lock in the case that the extension user forgets the lock code
126 Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features
(Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL).
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager.
• Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers will be displayed when Caller ID information is checked. Extension users can also modify the incoming telephone numbers manually.
•
Initial Display Selection
If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name, the user can select which is shown first on the display of the PT through system programming (
Caller ID Log Priority [904]).
• While a user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log, if the caller whose information is being viewed also left a voice message, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light will turn on.
The associated voice messages in that personal/common message area can be played or erased with the MESSAGE button or the TRANSFER button respectively.
• Even if there are message waiting indications left at a user's extension, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light that displays notifications from the Message Waiting feature (
Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button.
• If a user erases voice messages by any method (for example, by using BV or performing System Data
Clear), the caller's information is erased from the extension's Incoming Call Log simultaneously.
• Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged in the corresponding
Incoming Call Log (common or personal area).
• During a conversation with an extension or outside party, an extension user can transfer the call to another extension that has set incoming calls to be forwarded to that extension's personal message area, or can transfer the call to the personal message area using the Direct Message feature of BV. If the transferring user performs Call Transfer with Announcement, there is a chance that both parties may be recorded in the same message. In this case, the information of the last extension or outside party that recorded the message is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (personal area).
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.9.1 Calling with the Incoming Call Log
2.1.4 Erasing All Caller Information in the Common Area (Incoming Call Log in the Common Area—CLEAR
ALL)
2.1.5 Disregarding the Newest Call or Overwriting the Oldest Call in the Common Area Call Log (301st
Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area)
Feature Guide 127
1.17 Message Features
1.17 Message Features
1.17.1 Message Waiting
Description
When an extension user calls another extension user who does not answer the call, he or she can leave a message waiting indication. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user's telephone will light, indicating that a call was missed, or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or
Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature is waiting. A MESSAGE button can be used to call the caller back or listen to the message.
When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the MESSAGE button on it lights, or the Message/
Ringer Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on-hook shows the caller's information as shown below:
[Example]
105:Tom Smith
--- Extension no. and name of the person who left the message
Message/Message for Another
Extension buttons
This extension
Other extension*
* This button is useful when, for example, the manager checks messages left for another extension.
Conditions
• System programming determines the single line telephones (SLTs) that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension (
• If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number.
•
Message for Another Extension Button
A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can be customised as a Message for Another
Extension button. This button can be used on a PT that is allowed through system programming (
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]) to access messages (except Built-in Voice Message
[BV] messages) left for another extension or voice messages stored in another extension's VPS mailbox.
•
Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock
An extension user can lock or unlock message waiting indications to prevent others from viewing, calling back or clearing message waiting indications left at his or her extension. The operator or manager can override this lock to unlock it (Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL).
Even while this lock is on, the user can view, call back, or clear message waiting indications left at his or her own extension.
• Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left.
128 Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
• Message waiting indications are always left on the originally called extension. Message waiting indications cannot be sent to an FWD destination (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) or an idle
extension hunting destination (
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).
• A message waiting indication is automatically cleared when the called extension calls the caller back and the call is answered.
•
Message Waiting Indication via Voice Mail APT Integration
If a voice message is left for the called extension, it can be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button (
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
•
Message Waiting Indication via BV
If a voice message is left in the user's personal message area or the common message area, it can be played back with the lit MESSAGE button by the user or the operator/manager respectively (
• It is possible to activate the Message/Ringer Lamp (
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968])
on the KX-T7700 series telephones for the following incoming calls:
– Incoming call from another extension to a busy extension when the called extension has set Call
Waiting (Call Waiting Tone 1)
– Incoming doorphone call whose ring tone pattern is set to "S-Double" (
Pattern [706]) (except when using the Parallelled Telephone feature) when an optional doorphone
or doorbell/door chime is connected to the PBX
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV])
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide 129
1.17 Message Features
1.17.2 Absent Message
Description
Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other extension users when they are called. This message can explain the reason for their absence, and can be used by any extension user.
The following Absent Messages may be programmed:
Message No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Will Return Soon
Message
Gone Home
At Ext %%%
(Extension Number)
Back at %%:%%
(Hour:Minute) AM (or PM)
Out Until %%/%%
(Month/Day)*
In a Meeting
Notes
• * The date order varies depending on the user's country/area.
• The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension.
Conditions
• An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the extension every time the user goes off-hook.
• The caller must be using a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message.
User Manual References
1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller's Telephone Display (Absent Message)
130 Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
Description
When outside (CO) line calls are received from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre, the PBX can route incoming calls to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS according to a preprogrammed set of rules (SMS Routing Table). Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access.
If a user subscribes to his or her telephone company's Caller ID service and the PBX receives an SMS centre call from the registered SMS centre number, the PBX will relay the text message to the SLT. In all other cases, incoming outside (CO) line calls will be directed according to system programming (
Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
To make or receive SMS centre calls using fixed lines, the PBX and specific SLTs must be programmed so they will know how to handle those calls. To programme SLTs, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the SLTs.
Notes
• This feature complies with the following ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) specifications:
ETSI ES 201 912
• This feature is available only for SLTs that support SMS. SMS service depends on the contract with your telephone company.
[Programming Example: SMS Routing Table with Sub-address Numbers]
When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1/2 and "3847002" for CO 3, programme as follows:
1)
PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving* 1 : 1112224444
Location No.
1
2
(Cont.) :
:
8
Outside (CO) Line No.* 2
CO 1, CO 2
CO 3
:
:
Not Stored
Extension Jack No.* 3
Jack 01, Jack 02, Jack 03
Jack 10, Jack 11
:
:
Not Stored
*
1
*
2
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
* 3
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]
If the SMS centre supports sub-address numbers, up to 8 SLTs can be assigned as the SMS destinations for a single location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number.
Feature Guide 131
1.17 Message Features
2)
SLT setting
Extension Jack No.
Jack 01
Jack 02
Jack 10
(Cont.) :
:
SMS Centre Number for
Sending
SMS Centre Number for
Receiving
89* 1 P* 2 1112223333
89* 1 P* 2 1112223333
89* 1 P* 2 1112223333
:
:
1112224444
1112224444
1112224444
:
:
SMS Subaddress
1
2
1
:
:
*
1
*
2
89: Outside (CO) Line Access number used to make SMS centre calls using the fixed outside (CO) lines.
When the SMS centre can receive an SMS message from any telephone number, the Automatic
Line Access number or Outside (CO) Line Access number can also be used respectively.
P: Pause
In this example: a)
To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "38470011" as the destination.
b)
To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "38470012" as the destination.
c)
To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 10, enter "38470021" as the destination.
[Programming Example: SMS Routing Table without Sub-address Numbers]
When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1, "3847002" for CO 2, and "3847003" for CO 8, programme as follows:
1)
PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving: 1112224444
Location No.
1
2
(Cont.) :
:
8
Outside (CO) Line No.
CO 1
CO 2
:
:
CO 8
Extension Jack No.
Jack 01
Jack 02
:
:
Jack 08
If the SMS centre does not support sub-address numbers, only one SLT can be assigned for each location.
One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number.
132 Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
2)
SLT setting
Extension Jack No.
Jack 01
Jack 02
Jack 08
(Cont.) :
:
SMS Centre Number for
Sending
SMS Centre Number for
Receiving
89 P1112223333
89 P1112223333
1112224444
1112224444
89 P1112223333
:
:
1112224444
:
:
SMS Subaddress
–
–
–
:
:
In this example: a)
To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "3847001" as the destination.
b)
To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "3847002" as the destination.
c)
To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 08, enter "3847003" as the destination.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.
• The PBX relays text messages from the SMS centre to SMS-enabled SLTs, and vice versa.
• To receive SMS information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming (
• Each SMS-enabled SLT must be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming (
• If an SLT user sets the Automatic Callback Busy feature by dialling "6" because the selected line is busy when he or she tries to send a text message, the SLT will ring when the line becomes idle. To send the text message, the user must answer the callback ring, go on-hook, and then make an SMS centre call again.
• When a call is received on one of the outside (CO) lines preprogrammed in an SMS Routing Table, the destination SLT may ring one time.
• If a user wants to receive SMS messages on an SLT, it is recommended to not connect a proprietary telephone (PT) in parallel. If the PT user answers the call, the SMS message will not be received.
• When an SMS centre call is received at an SLT that has set the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature, the
FWD feature will not function and the SMS message is received by that SLT.
• When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call, in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature), because it takes very little time to
send SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of call duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]).
• When a user on an SLT that is in "TONE (DTMF)" mode makes an SMS call using outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode through system programming (
centre number is longer than supported, for example 16 digits, the SMS call may not be completed. In this case, set the dialling mode of the SLT to "PULSE" mode using the switch.
Feature Guide 133
1.17 Message Features
Installation Manual References
2.3.5 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493)
134 Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
Description
Proprietary telephones (PTs) and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles feature a wide variety of feature buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below.
Note that certain models do not have certain buttons.
For a description of the buttons found on each PT or DSS Console, please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PT or DSS Console.
[PT]
Button
Navigator Key
Volume Key
PROGRAM
FLASH/RECALL
HOLD
SP-PHONE
(Speakerphone)
MONITOR
MESSAGE
Function
Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset, and the display contrast, or to select desired items.
Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset.
Used to enter and exit programming mode.
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up
(Flash/Recall mode), or to send an EFA (External Feature Access) signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access external features (EFA mode).
Used to place a call on hold.
Used to select handset or hands-free operation.
REDIAL
TRANSFER
Flexible CO
INTERCOM
AUTO ANS (Auto
Answer)/MUTE
VOICE CALL
Used to select hands-free dialling and monitor operation.
Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left a message waiting indication, or play back voice messages. This button is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode), except for on KX-T7700 series telephones. With KX-T7700 series telephones, the Message/Ringer Lamp is lit when a message waiting indication is left at an extension.
Used to redial the last number dialled.
Used to transfer a call to another party.
Used to access an outside (CO) line (or outside (CO) line group) when making or receiving a call. The button's preprogrammed Outside (CO) Line Access method determines which line is selected (Default: Single-CO [S-CO]). Can also be customised as a feature button.
Used to make or receive intercom calls.
Used to answer an intercom call automatically in hands-free mode, or to mute the built-in microphone during a conversation.
Used to answer an intercom call automatically.
Feature Guide 135
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Button
AUTO DIAL/STORE
CONF (Conference)
FWD/DND (Call
Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb)
PAUSE
PF (Programmable
Feature)
Function
Used for System Speed Dialling/Saved Number Redial, playing back personal/ common BV outgoing messages (OGMs) used by the Built-in Voice Message
(BV) feature, and storing programme changes.
Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call.
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension.
Used to insert a dialling pause in a stored number.
Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button.
[DSS Console]
Button
Flexible DSS
PF
Usage
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be customised as different feature buttons.
Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button.
Conditions
• Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.
User Manual References
1.1.1 Before Operating a Telephone
136 Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
Description
Flexible buttons are buttons whose functions can be customised through either system or personal programming. The following types of flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles:
a)
Flexible CO buttons
b)
Flexible DSS buttons
c)
Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
d)
Flexible MESSAGE button
[Button Usage]
Button
Single-CO (S-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Other-CO (O-CO)
Function
Used to access a specified outside (CO) line for making or receiving calls (
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Used to access an idle outside (CO) line in a specified outside (CO) line group for making calls. Incoming calls from outside (CO) lines in the assigned outside
(CO) line group arrive at this button (
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Used to access an idle outside (CO) line for making calls. Incoming calls from the assigned outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons, arrive at this button (
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation (
Direct Station
Selection (DSS)
One-touch Dialling
Message
Message for Another
Extension
FWD/DND (Call
Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb)
Save
Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one-touch operation (
Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left the message waiting indication, or play back voice messages (
Used to access messages (except Built-in Voice Message [BV] messages) left for another extension or voice messages stored in another extension's Voice
Processing System (VPS) mailbox (
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension (
Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW).
Conference
Caller ID Indication—
Personal
Used to store a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later (
Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call (
Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in his or her personal area, store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller (
Feature Guide 137
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Button
Caller ID Selection—
Personal
Caller ID Indication—
Common
Caller ID Selection—
Common
Log-in/Log-out
Day
Night
Lunch
Extension Lock
2-way Record
2-way Transfer
Live Call Screening
(LCS)
LCS Cancel
Voice Mail (VM)
Transfer
Function
Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the personal area call log is full (
Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in the common area, store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller (
Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the common area call log is full (
Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status (
Used to change the time service mode to day mode (
Used to change the time service mode to night mode (
Used to change the time service mode to lunch mode (
Used to remotely lock or unlock another extension (
Used to record a conversation into the user's own mailbox (
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension (
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Used to listen while a caller is leaving a message in the user's voice mailbox and, if desired, intercept the call (
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Used to stop monitoring the user's own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a message, or stop the alert tone heard in private mode while a caller is leaving a message (
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension (
Conditions
•
Extension button confirmation
A display PT user can confirm the button settings, such as the flexible CO button, by pressing the corresponding button while on-hook.
• The Day, Night, Lunch, and Extension Lock buttons can only be assigned to flexible DSS buttons at an extension assigned as the operator or manager.
User Manual References
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
138 Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.3 LED Indication
Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: Single-CO (S-CO), Group-CO (G-CO), Other-CO (O-CO), INTERCOM
Corresponding Extension Status Button: Direct Station Selection (DSS)
1.
Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
• Incoming call from an outside (CO) line/another extension: Red flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No messages present and no incoming call: Off
2.
Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons
Line Status
Button
Light
Pattern
Off
Green on
Slow green flashing
Moderate– speed green flashing
Rapid green flashing
Red on
Slow red flashing
Rapid red flashing
–
S-CO
Outside (CO) Line Status
G-CO
Idle
O-CO
This extension is using the line.
This extension is holding the line.
–
Another extension is holding the line.
Line(s) in use
–
Incoming call
–
–
–
–
–
Intercom
Line Status
INTERCOM
This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Call Hold or using the line for an unattended conference.
Incoming call
Feature Guide 139
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
3.
Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
Corresponding Extension
Status Button
Light Pattern
DSS
Off
Slow red flashing
Moderate-speed red flashing
Red on
Idle
Call Forwarding (FWD)*
Do Not Disturb (DND)*
Busy
* This setting can be changed through system programming (
4.
Flashing Light Patterns
1 s
Slow Flashing
Moderate-speed Flashing
Rapid Flashing
Conditions
• Incoming outside (CO) line calls arrive on available buttons in the following priority:
Feature Guide References
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
140 Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.4 Display Information
Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving calls:
Display Item
The extension number and name of the calling or called extension
Display Example
123: Tom Smith
The status of the called extension
123: Busy
The name and number of the doorphone DoorPhone 1
The telephone number dialled
1234567890
The extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded
102:Mike
The received call information a) Caller's name b) Caller's number c) Outside (CO) line number
The call charge of the current outside
(CO) line call
ABC Company
12345678
Call on CO 1
CO1: 12.35 EUR
The duration of the current outside (CO) line call
CO 1 0:01'15
–
–
–
Conditions
Extension numbers and names are programmable (
[604]). If an extension name is not
stored, only the extension number will be displayed.
–
The first line message can be either (a) or (b) at each extension through system programming (
Caller ID Log Priority [904]).
The charge of a call is displayed when Call Charge Calculation is enabled through system programming (
Calculation [441]). Settings such
as the call charge rate, decimal point position and currency can be assigned through system programming (
The display remains for 5 seconds after the call is finished.
The outgoing outside (CO) line call duration starts when the specified time expires (
Duration Counter Start [204]).
The display does not show the duration of intercom calls.
Feature Guide 141
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Conditions
•
Display Contrast
The display contrast can be adjusted with the Navigator key or the CONTRAST selector. This is available only for PTs.
•
Ringer Volume
The volume of the ringer can be adjusted with the RINGER Volume selector.
•
Self-extension Number
A display PT user can confirm his or her own jack number and extension number on the display. Every time the " " key is pressed, the display switches between "date (month [day], day [month]) and time",
"date (month [day], day [month], year, day of the week)", and "extension number (and extension name if stored)".
•
Date and Time Set
The current date and time are set through system programming (
Date & Time [000]) or the operator/
manager service features. The time format shown on the display PTs while on-hook, "12 h" or "24 h", can also be selected through system programming (
• Characters (name) or digits (telephone number) exceeding the maximum length of the display are not displayed.
However, even if the information is not displayed properly, the received information is not altered. When the information displayed by pressing specific buttons (One-touch Dialling, REDIAL, Save) while onhook exceeds 17 characters, the "&" mark will be shown on the right side of the display.
• The call charge, called party's name (when a call is made using System Speed Dialling with a name assigned), and call duration can be displayed alternately by pressing the CO button whose indicator is green. Whether the charge or duration is displayed first can be selected through system programming
(
LCD Display Mode [630]). When Call Charge Calculation [441] is set to "Disable", call charge
information is not displayed.
• For each call charge, up to 7 digits excluding the decimal point can be displayed. If the call charge exceeds 7 digits, considering that the decimal point does not move, all numbers will be replaced by nines (e.g., 99999.99).
• The number of decimal digits displayed for the call charge can be programmed through system programming (
Decimal Places [190]). The charge is rounded up to the preprogrammed number of
decimal digits.
• On a conference call, call charge information is not displayed.
User Manual References
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
142 Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
1.19 Voice Mail Features
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) that supports APT Integration can provide many features and conveniences that are unachievable using traditional voice mail systems that rely on Inband (DTMF)
Integration.
Many of these features are explained below. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the Panasonic VPS.
1.
Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup (or DIP switch initialisation without a PC)
The PBX shares information with the VPS during setup that allows the VPS to automatically create the appropriate mailboxes for all extension numbers.
The following settings to enable APT Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS.
When 2 VPSs are connected to the PBX, note that each extension can have only one mailbox, but when the VPSs have executed Automatic Configuration, an extension has a mailbox in both VPSs. Therefore, an extension user must delete a mailbox in either VPS so that there are no duplicates.
Extension group 7
7
8
VPS
Port 1
Port 2
PBX
VPS
15
16
Port 1
Port 2
Extension group 8
This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP50 series VPS, which can be connected with 4-conductor wire to 4 extension jacks of the PBX.
[Programming Example: Voice Mail Table]
APT Integration
Enable
VM 1 APT Port*
Port 7 & 8
1 VM 2 APT Port* 2
Port 15 & 16
* 1
* 2
In this example:
When "Port 7 & 8" is selected for VPS1, extension jacks 07 and 08 are placed in extension group 7 automatically (
Extension Group [600]). Likewise, when "Port 15 & 16" is selected for VPS2,
extension jacks 15 and 16 are placed in extension group 8 automatically. Each extension group can be
Feature Guide 143
1.19 Voice Mail Features
connected to only one VPS. Also the idle extension hunting type is set as "Circular" (
[101]), and the Voice Mail (VM) Hunting Chain and Automated Attendant (AA) Hunting Chain are
automatically enabled in each of these 2 extension groups (
Note
When "Disable" is selected, the other settings above are reset to their default values.
2.
AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages.
3.
VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.
AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the
VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
1.
AA to Extension
AA receives and answers outside (CO) line calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling from the calling party.
Outside (CO) Line Call
DIL
PBX
Transfer
Extension
Busy/No Answer
(Record message)
VPS
AA 1
AA Hunting Chain
AA 2
144 Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
2.
Extension Backup
If the VPS is assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator, for the same outside (CO) line, the VPS can be used as a backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming outside (CO) line call.
In order to use this feature, Delayed Ringing must be set for the VPS (
Outside (CO) Line Call
Normal
PBX
Immediately
Extension
(e.g., Operator)
10 s delay
15 s delay
VPS
AA 1
AA 2
3.
Status Notification to the VPS
When a call is redirected to the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the called extension to the VPS. This allows the VPS to appropriately handle the call, playing the appropriate OGM for the caller. For example, if the called extension is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the OGM (e.g., "I am unable to answer your call right now, but I will get back to you shortly.") can be played.
VM Service
1.
Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends special messages to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-
on ID).
2.
FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can set his or her calls to be forwarded to the VPS (
VPS, and the VPS answers the call with the appropriate OGM (e.g., "Hi, I'm out of the office today...").
Outside (CO) Line Call
DIL, DISA
PBX
Intercom Call
(by Extension,
Operator, etc.)
Extension
FWD
VPS
Port 1
VM Hunting
Chain
Port 2
Feature Guide 145
1.19 Voice Mail Features
3.
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
Outside (CO) line calls via DISA (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) can be programmed
to be automatically redirected to an extension user's mailbox when the extension user does not or cannot answer them (
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing). The VPS can answer the call with an OGM (e.g., "I
can't take your call now...") and callers can leave messages in the mailbox. In order to use this feature, a voice mail extension number must be assigned as the intercept destination for the original destination extension that received the call (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416], Flexible Ringing—
Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]), and "Intercept" must be
selected through system programming (
Outside (CO) Line Call
DISA
PBX
Extension
Intercept
Immediately
5 s delay
VPS
Port 1
Port 2
4.
Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
Extension users can transfer calls to a mailbox, after which callers can leave a message for the desired party. While answering a call, the extension user simply presses the VM Transfer button and enters the extension number of the party the caller wishes to leave a message for. The VPS will answer the transferred call and record a message into the appropriate mailbox.
VM Transfer Button
In order to use this feature, the extension user must use a flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button customised as a VM Transfer button. A voice mail extension number must be assigned to the button when creating it.
5.
Listening to Recorded Messages
After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message (
proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access; he or she does not need to enter a mailbox number. A single line telephone
(SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number.
6.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Similar to a conventional home answering machine, LCS allows a PT user to monitor his or her own mailbox as a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call simply by pressing the LCS button.
PT users can choose one of 2 ways to perform LCS, through personal programming (Live Call
Screening [LCS] Mode Set):
Hands-free mode: The user can screen calls automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear an alert tone when a message is being recorded in his or her mailbox.
To screen calls, the user must press the MONITOR, SP-PHONE, or LCS button.
146 Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
LCS/LCS Cancel Button
A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as an LCS or LCS Cancel button.
7.
2-way Recording into the VPS
PT users can record their own telephone conversations. These recordings can be stored in the PT user's own mailbox (2-way Record) or in another user's mailbox (2-way Transfer), depending on which button the user presses to begin recording.
2-way Record/2-way Transfer Button
A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as a 2-way Record or 2-way Transfer button.
Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded before beginning to record any telephone conversation.
Conditions
[General]
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:
– FWD—All Calls
– FWD—Busy/No Answer
– DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is forwarded to the VPS by the
IRNA feature from a DISA ring group, the PBX will send the VPS the mailbox number of the extension within the DISA ring group that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]
• To prevent the unauthorised screening of calls, a 3-digit password must be entered when activating LCS for an extension. If the user forgets his or her password, it can be cleared by the operator or manager
(LCS Password Control).
• If an extension user is screening a call and then goes off-hook to answer it, the VPS will either stop or continue recording the message, according to system programming (
• If a call arrives while an extension user is having a conversation with another party and the extension has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone. The user can put the existing call on hold before accessing LCS.
[2-way Recording into the VPS]
• If all ports of the VPS are busy when a user tries to record a conversation:
– The user hears an alarm tone when pressing the 2-way Record button.
– The user hears an alarm tone after pressing the 2-way Transfer button followed by an extension number.
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 147
1.19 Voice Mail Features
User Manual References
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
148 Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) or similar product from another manufacturer can provide
Automated Attendant (AA) and Voice Mail (VM) services when connected to the PBX.
The VPS and PBX communicate with each other by sending DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals.
For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the VPS.
1.
AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages.
2.
VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.
AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the
VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
If the VPS transfers a call via the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called party using a DTMF status signal so that the VPS will know the status. This enables the VPS to quickly play an appropriate OGM to the caller (e.g., "I'm handling another call now...", "I'm away from my desk now...", etc.).
The DTMF status signals sent by the PBX are explained below.
[DTMF Status Signals]
Status
Ringback Tone
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
DND Tone
Answer
Confirm
Disconnect
FWD to VM Ringback Tone
FWD to VM Busy Tone
Condition
The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension.
The called extension is busy.
The dialled number is invalid.
The called extension has set DND (
The called extension has answered the call.
The PBX confirms that a feature (such as
Message Waiting) has been set or cancelled on the extension.
The caller has hung up.
The called extension has set FWD to VPS (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) and the PBX is
calling another port of the VPS.
The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
DTMF Status Signal
1
2
3
4
5
9
#9
6
7
Feature Guide 149
1.19 Voice Mail Features
Status
FWD to Extension Ringback
Tone
Condition
The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialled, most likely because the called extension has set its calls to be forwarded to another extension or because it is a member of an idle extension hunting group (
DTMF Status Signal
8
System Programming
The following settings to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS. This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP series VPS, which can be connected to up to 4 extension jacks of the PBX.
[Programming Example: Voice Mail Table]
DTMF Integration*
Enable
1
Jack 07
Enable
Voice Mail Port* 2
Jack 08 Jack 15
Enable Disable
Jack 16
Disable
Numbering Plan* 3
Plan 1 or Plan 2
* 1
* 2
* 3
In this example:
To enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain, programme as follows:
1)
Assign all Voice Mail extensions to one extension group in Extension Group [600].
2)
Assign "Enable" to the group in Hunting Group Set [100].
3)
Select the hunting type of the group in Hunting Type [101].
VM Service
1.
Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-on
ID).
2.
Listening to Recorded Messages
After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message (
proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access. When the button is pressed, the PBX calls the voice mail extension, then sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate the extension's mailbox number.
A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message
Waiting Answer feature number.
Conditions
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:
150 Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
– FWD—All Calls
– FWD—Busy/No Answer
– DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) (
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing, 1.15.6 Direct Inward
For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by
IRNA from a DISA ring group, the PBX will transmit the mailbox number of the receiving extension with the lowest jack number.
• In order to achieve proper recording quality, Data Line Security should be turned on for the VPS (
• Each extension's mailbox number is the same as its extension number.
• If "TA series" cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVP series VPS, select "KX-
T1232". Follow the steps for the KX-T1232.
User Manual References
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide 151
1.20 Administrative Information Features
1.20 Administrative Information Features
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description
Automatically logs detailed information for the PBX.
1.
SMDR Output Port
The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) data to a PC, printer, etc.
2.
SMDR Output Data
The following data can be logged and sent to the SMDR output port:
a)
Outside (CO) line call information (incoming/outgoing)
b)
Call charge information (outgoing)
Memory for SMDR: A limited number of call records can be stored in the PBX. If the memory becomes full, the oldest call will be overwritten each time a call is received.
When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is installed, the number of calls that can be stored increases from 64 to 10 000.
152 Feature Guide
3.
SMDR Format and Contents
[Example]
Pattern A: Without call charge information
Date Time Ext.
CO Dial number
12/31/05 12:52PM 103 05 12345678901234567890123456789012
12/31/05 12:53PM 103 02 2013570846
12/31/05 *12:54PM 101 02
12/31/05 12:55PM 101B 02
12/31/05 12:56PM 107B 03
2013570846
< > 2013570846
0921234557
12/31/05 1:04PM 103 06 092. . . 1438
2013570846 12/31/05 1:04PM 102 05
12/31/05 1:05PM 103 01
12/31/05 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789
12/31/05 1:06PM C-05 02 0921234567
12/31/05 1:07PM 103 01 0921234567
12/31/05 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567
12/31/05 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321
12/31/05 2:27PM 116 05 9=0924567123
12/31/05 3:25PM 02 < UCD waiting >
1.20 Administrative Information Features
Duration Code
00:00'16" . . . .
00:01'43" . . . .
00:07'48" . . . .
00:00'43" . . . .
00:01'43" . . . .
00:00'06" 4536
00:00'09" . . . .
0
00:00'08" . . . . 0
00:00'08" . . . .
00:00'17" . . . . 2
00:11'00" . . 13
00:11'00" .101
00:03'00" . . . .
00:13'55" . . . .
00:11'48" . . . .
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Pattern B: With call charge information
(5)
Date Time Ext.
CO Dial number Duration
12/31/05 12:52PM 103 05 123456789012345678901234 00:00'16"
12/31/05 12:53PM 103 02 00:01'43"
12/31/05 *12:54PM 101 02
12/31/05 12:55PM 101B 02
00:07'48"
00:00'43"
12/31/05 12:56PM 107B 03
12/31/05 1:04PM 103 06 092. . . 1438
00:01'43"
00:00'06"
12/31/05 1:04PM 102 05
12/31/05 1:05PM 103 01
12/31/05 1:06PM 103 01 092123456789
12/31/05 1:06PM C-05 02 0921234567
12/31/05 1:07PM 103 01 0921234567
12/31/05 2:15PM 103 01 0921234567
12/31/05 2:26PM 103 01 F/0927654321
12/31/05 2:27PM 116 05 9=0924567123
12/31/05 3:25PM 02 < UCD waiting >
00:00'09"
00:00'08"
00:00'08"
00:00'17"
00:11'00"
00:11'00"
00:03'00"
00:13'55"
00:11'48"
(6) (7)
Charge Code
0.04 EUR
0.02 EUR
0.02 EUR
0.04 EUR
0.55 EUR
0.55 EUR
0.15 EUR
0.67 EUR
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
4536
. . . .
0
. . . . 0
. . . .
. . . . 2
. . 13
.101
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8) (7)
Feature Guide 153
1.20 Administrative Information Features
[Explanation]
The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. The section numbers below refer to the field indicated by the numbers above.
Section Number
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Date
Data Description
Shows the date (Month/Day/Year) of the call (
[000]). The date order varies depending on the user's country/
area.
Time
Shows the start time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM. Also shows the following code:
*: Transferred call (
Ext. (Extension)
Shows the number of the extension that was engaged in the call.
Also shows the following codes:
xxxB: Call answered by the BV feature (
(xxx=Number of the extension to which the call was directed before the BV feature answered)
Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged.
C-xx: Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) line call via the DISA feature (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
(xx=Outside (CO) line number that receives the DISA call)
CO
Shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call.
154 Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Features
Section Number
(5)
Data
Dial number
(6)
(7)
Duration
Code
Description
[Outside (CO) Line Call]
Outgoing Outside (CO) Line Call
Shows the dialled telephone number *1 . Digits shown are as follows:
F/: Flash/recall signal (
=: Host PBX Access code marker (
Access code and the dialled number when a Host PBX Access code is entered.
. (dot): Secret Dialling
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call
Shows
<incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits). A caller's telephone number is displayed only when an optional Caller ID card is installed and "With CID" is selected
in Caller ID SMDR Format [906]. It is also possible to show a
caller's telephone number before the call is answered (
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]).
Also shows the following codes:
<DISA incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the
DISA feature
<BV incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call to the common message area of the BV feature
<DIL incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DIL feature (
<UCD waiting>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature (
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD))
When the UCD waiting call is answered, a new record is started.
Shows the duration of the outside (CO) line call or the UCD call waiting time in hours/minutes/seconds.
Shows the account code appended to the call (
Account Code Entry), the account code index number (e.g.,
13), the number of the extension that used the Walking COS feature (e.g., 101), or DISA security code status (e.g., 0).
0: A DISA incoming call without a DISA security code
1 to 4: A DISA incoming call with a DISA security code number
Actual DISA security codes are not printed by SMDR (
Feature Guide 155
1.20 Administrative Information Features
Section Number
(8)
Data
Charge
Description
Shows the call charge of the outside (CO) line call (
Charge Calculation [441]). Up to 3 currency characters (e.g.,
EUR for Euro) can be assigned through system programming
(
Currency [921]). The charge can consist of up to 7 digits
(e.g., 88888.75), and the number of decimal places can be assigned through system programming (
*1
If "With Charge" is selected, the maximum is 24 digits.
The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are printed or displayed by SMDR.
[Programmable Items]
Item
Incoming/Outgoing outside
(CO) line call
Caller's identification
Description
Controls whether incoming/outgoing outside (CO) line calls are shown (
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]). Even
if "On" or "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls or even if "On" is selected for incoming outside (CO) line calls, when "MODE
2" is selected in SMDR Mode for Printing [929], the call log
information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
If "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls, only calls that
are checked in TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] and are
allowed, are shown.
Controls whether a caller's telephone number is shown (
SMDR Format [906]). When this is set to display telephone numbers,
even if the PBX receives a caller's name by the Caller ID feature, only the telephone number is shown.
Secret Dialling
Account Code
Call Charge
Controls whether a secret dialling number stored in System Speed
Dialling Number [001] or stored as a One-touch Dialling button is
shown by SMDR (
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]).
Controls whether the account code stored in Account Code [310] or
just the index of the account code is shown (
[805]). The index of the account code is shown when "Verify-All" or
"Verify-Toll" is selected in Account Code Mode [605].
Controls whether the charge for outside (CO) line calls is shown or not (
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]), or whether
nonessential zeros that precede the charge are shown by SMDR (
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]).
156 Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Features
Item Description
System programming items
Controls whether system programming items that have already been assigned are shown based on the following parameters (
a)
All para: All data
b)
System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para",
"DSS para" and "Speed dial"
c)
CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line
d)
Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension
e)
DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station
Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console
f)
Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and
names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System
g)
Stop output: Not shown
Conditions
• SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is restarted. It is cleared when output via RS-232C to a PC, printer, etc., or by performing System Data Clear.
•
Multilingual Display by SMDR
It is possible to select the display language used for SMDR through system programming (
• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]) after the end
of seizing an outside (CO) line or dialling before starting the SMDR timer for outgoing outside (CO) line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the
PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT) shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR.
If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line (
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will automatically start the timer (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the
outside party answers the call.
• For SMS users
When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call (
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support), in some
cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR, because it takes very little time to send
SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of call duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]).
•
SMDR Format
The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming (
[801]) in order to match the paper size being used by the printer:
a)
Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.
b)
Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length.
The title is placed on the first 3 lines of every page.
To enable the changes, you must turn the power switch of the PBX off and back on again after changing this setting.
Feature Guide 157
1.20 Administrative Information Features
Page
Length
(66 lines)
Skip
Perforation
Machine
Perforation
•
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters
The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port through system programming (
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]):
a)
New Line (NL) Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF".
b)
Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer.
c)
Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character.
d)
Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
e)
Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string that composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
• The codes for "Dial number" will be abbreviated as shown below, if all of the following conditions are met:
– an optional Caller ID card is installed.
–
"With CID" is selected in Caller ID SMDR Format [906].
–
"With Charge" is selected in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922].
Abbreviation of codes:
• If the charge of a call exceeds 7 digits, considering that the decimal point does not move, all numbers will be replaced by nines (e.g., 99999.99).
• Before changing the decimal point position (
Decimal Places [190]), output or clear all SMDR data.
Otherwise, the charge value for the accumulated data will be displayed incorrectly.
Installation Manual References
2.3.8 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491)
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear
158 Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Features
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Description
Calls can also be logged according to which extension they were made from, and printed out. An extension assigned as the manager extension can use the following features through manager programming:
a)
Call Log Print Out and Clear, for Each Extension
b)
All Clear
[Example]
The manager can print out call logs for each extension. Up to 500 outgoing outside (CO) line calls can be logged in the PBX. When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is installed, the number of calls that can be stored increases to 10 000. If the memory becomes full, the oldest call will be overwritten each time a call is received.
Calls stored since the manager cleared the call log for an extension can be printed out.
(1)
**********************************************
* 103 : Tony Viola *
**********************************************
Starting Date
Present Date
: Dec.29.05 07:00PM**
: Dec.31.05 09:00PM
Date Time Ext.
CO
12/31/05
12/31/05
12/31/05
12/31/05
*12:52PM
1:04PM
1:06PM
1:07PM
12/31/05
12/31/05
2:15PM
2:26PM
103
103
103
103
103
103
05
06
01
01
01
01
Dial number
123456789012345678901234
092...1438
092123456789
0921234567
0921234567
F/0927654321
Duration
00:00'16 "
00:00'06 "
00:00'08 "
00:11'00 "
00:11'00 "
00:03'00 "
Total
Charge Code
0.04 EUR
0.02 EUR
0.02 EUR
0.55 EUR
0.55 EUR
0.15 EUR
1.33 EUR
....
4536
....
..13
.101
....
(2)
(1) "Starting Date" shows the start date (Month/Day/Year) of the call log. "**" indicates that there may be overwritten calls that are not shown on the print out. In this case, the total of the shown call charges may be different from the actual total charge. The total charge under the line is the correct one. The date format varies depending on the user's country/area.
(2) "Charge" shows the call charge when Call Charge Calculation is enabled (
Calculation [441]) and "With Charge" is selected (
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922])
through system programming. A call charge of up to 7 digits is shown for each call, and the Total can consist of up to a maximum of 17 digits including whole numbers (max. 10 digits), the decimal point, and a preprogrammed number of decimal digits (max. 6 digits) (
Decimal Places [190]). If the call
charge exceeds the maximum number of digits, considering that the decimal point does not move, all numbers will be replaced by nines.
Conditions
• Call Log Printout data is not deleted even if the PBX is restarted. It is cleared through manager programming or by performing System Data Clear.
• Even if an extension user holds a call, the duration of the call will be counted. If an extension user transfers the call, the count of duration will restart at the destination extension.
Feature Guide 159
1.20 Administrative Information Features
•
SMDR Mode for Printing
One of the following modes can be selected through system programming (
a)
MODE 1
Outside (CO) line call information is displayed by SMDR (
1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)), and call log information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
b)
MODE 2
Only call log information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
•
or stored as a One-touch Dialling button is shown by Call Log Printout (
Suppression [803]). When "Secret" is selected, numbers dialled secretly will be shown as dots.
• It is possible to control whether "Dial number" is shown by Call Log Printout (
• Before changing the decimal point position (
Decimal Places [190]), clear all Call Log Printout data.
Otherwise, the charge value for the accumulated data will be displayed incorrectly.
Installation Manual References
2.3.8 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491)
4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear
User Manual References
3.2.2 Changing Call Logs and Call Charges
160 Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Features
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
Description
The PBX can calculate call charges for outside (CO) line calls to preprogrammed destinations. The call charge information can be shown on SMDR and the display of proprietary telephones (PTs).
Note
This feature is a simple estimation of call charges and will not necessarily match the charges billed by your telephone company.
[Programming Procedures]
1.
Call Charge Calculation
Turn on Call Charge Calculation for each outside (CO) line to enable this feature (
2.
Time Table
Since the charge of a call may vary depending on the time of day and the day of the week, 3 call charge rates, Peak/Off Peak/Economy, can be assigned for each hour of each day of the week.
Up to 4 different Time Tables can be programmed (
Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4
carrying the call (
Call Charge Table Assignment [442]).
3.
Call Charge Table
A total of 100 leading numbers* 1 (Max. 10 digits) can be stored as destinations to decide how a call is charged for each call charge rate (Peak/Off Peak/Economy). A leading number can have different values in each of the 4 tables. Which Call Charge Table is applied to a certain call is decided by the outside (CO) line carrying the call (
Call Charge Table Assignment [442]).
The values to be set for each call charge rate are as follows*
2
:
– Flat Charge
– Flat Duration
– Unit Charge
– Unit Duration
*
1
*
2
Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/184],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/185],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/186],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/187],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/181/188],
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/182/189]
Feature Guide 161
1.20 Administrative Information Features
[Programming Example]
<Table Selection>
Outside (CO)
Line No.
(Cont.) :
:
1
2
Table No.
1
3
:
:
<Time Table>
Time Table 1
Week
Sunday
Monday
(Cont.) :
:
Saturday
AM
PM
AM
PM
:
:
AM
PM
12
E
O
E
E
:
:
E
E
1
E
O
E
E
:
:
E
E
2
E
O
E
E
:
:
E
E
P: Peak O: Off Peak E: Economy
E
E
3
O
E
:
:
P
E
:
:
P
P
4
O
E
E
E
:
:
O
P
5
O
E
E
E
:
:
O
P
7
O
P
E
E
:
:
O
P
6
O
E
E
E
:
:
O
P
8
O
P
E
E
:
:
O
P
9
O
P
E
E
:
:
O
P
11
O
P
E
E
:
:
O
P
10
O
P
E
E
<Call Charge Table>
Location
No.
(Cont.) :
:
99
00
01
02
03
Leading
No.
Flat Charge and Duration
70 / 60 s
Peak
Unit Charge and Duration
40 / 30 s 013
012
02
03
:
:
099
100 / 180 s
:
:
100 / 180 s
50 / 30 s
:
:
50 / 30 s
Call Charge Table 1
Off Peak
Flat Charge and Duration
50 / 60 s
Unit Charge and Duration
30 / 30 s
Economy
Flat Charge and Duration
Unit Charge and Duration
40 / 60 s 25 / 30 s
20 / 40 s
:
:
20 / 40 s
10 / 50 s
:
:
10 / 50 s
20 / 40 s
:
:
20 / 40 s
10 / 60 s
:
:
10 / 60 s
Note
If the dialled number does not match any Leading Number stored in the call charge table, the call charge for location number "99" is applied to the call. Therefore it is necessary to set the values for location number "99".
4.
Calculation Method
The call charge is calculated based on the following graph:
Flat Charge
Unit Charge
Unit Duration
Flat Duration
Call Duration
Waiting time before the call duration counter starts
Duration
: Point where the call charge increases
162 Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Features a)
If the Call Duration is less than the Flat Duration:
Call Charge
=
Flat Charge
b)
If the Call Duration is more than the Flat Duration:
Call Charge
=
Flat Charge Unit Charge Unit Charge Whole Number Part of
Call Duration Flat Duration
Unit Duration
[Programming Example] (Using the example shown in "3. Call Charge Table")
If the dialled number is "03XXXX", and the call is made at Peak time.
a)
If the Call Duration is 160 s:
Call Charge
=
100
Flat Charge
b)
If the Call Duration is 250 s:
Call Charge
=
100 50 50
Flat Charge
Unit Charge
Unit Charge
2
=
250
Call Duration Flat Duration
250
30
180
=
2.333...
Unit Duration
5.
Call Charge Display
Information about the call charge can be shown on the display of a PT. The display can contain up to 3 characters (e.g., EUR for Euro) for the currency (
Currency [921]) and up to 7 digits, excluding the
decimal point, for each call charge. The decimal point position (the number of significant decimal digits) for the charge can also be programmed (
Decimal Places [190]). Additionally, the order in which
information is displayed can be programmed (
LCD Display Mode [630]). For more information, refer
to "1.18.4 Display Information".
6.
Budget Management
It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension (
usage. If the total of call charges reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further outside (CO) line calls (
Budget Limit Selection [926]). An extension assigned as the manager can increase the
limit or clear the previous call charges. For more information, refer to "1.8.3 Budget Management".
7.
Call Charge Management
An extension assigned as the manager extension can access the following features through manager programming:
a.
Call Charge Reference and Clear, for Each Extension/Each Outside (CO) Line/Account Code
b.
All Clear
Feature Guide 163
1.20 Administrative Information Features c.
Call Charge Print Out
d.
Budget Management for Each Extension (
[Example of Call Charge Reference]
Call Log Printout for Each Extension:
**********************************************
* 103 : Tony Viola *
**********************************************
Starting Date
Present Date
: Dec.29.05 07:00PM**
: Dec.31.05 09:00PM
Date Time Ext.
CO
12/31/05
12/31/05
12/31/05
*12:52PM
1:04PM
1:06PM
12/31/05
12/31/05
12/31/05
1:07PM
2:15PM
2:26PM
103
103
103
103
103
103
05
06
01
01
01
01
Dial number
123456789012345678901234
092...1438
092123456789
0921234567
0921234567
F/0927654321
Duration
00:00'16 "
00:00'06 "
00:00'08 "
00:11'00 "
00:11'00 "
00:03'00 "
Total
Charge Code
0.04 EUR
0.02 EUR
0.02 EUR
0.55 EUR
0.55 EUR
0.15 EUR
1.33 EUR
....
4536
....
..13
.101
....
Conditions
• When searching for a Leading Number in a Call Charge Table, the PBX checks only the dialled telephone number, excluding Carrier Exception codes (
Carrier Exception Code [300]), Host PBX
Access codes (
Host PBX Access Code [403]), and 1st Carrier Selection code (
• When the dialled number matches several Leading Numbers in the Call Charge Table, the location with the longest matching number is selected.
• The PBX only checks the numbers dialled within a preprogrammed length of time (
Counter Start [204]). The rest of the numbers are not applied for the Leading Number check.
[Example]
<Call Charge Table>
Location
No.
00
01
(Cont.) :
:
Leading
No.
014
01
:
:
Call Charge Table 1
Peak
Flat Charge and Duration
Unit Charge and Duration
50 / 60 s
45 / 60 s
:
:
30 / 30 s
25 / 30 s
:
:
In this example:
[204], location number "01" will be selected. SMDR shows "014XXXX" as the "Dial number".
•
with your telephone company's inter-digit timer.
• The call charge rate (Peak/Off Peak/Economy) when a call is established is used to calculate the call charge.
• If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line (
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will automatically start the timer (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the
164 Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Features
outside party answers the call.
Note that Call Charge Calculation will not function if the call duration counter is set to "Instantly" when
Reverse Signal Detection is disabled.
• When Flat Duration is set to "0", the total of the Flat Charge and Unit Charge is charged immediately after the preprogrammed length of time (
Call Duration Counter Start [204]) or the outside party
answers the call.
When Unit Duration is set to "0", the Flat Charge is charged immediately after the preprogrammed length of time or the outside party answers the call. Then, the Unit Charge is charged just once, when the Flat Duration expires.
[Example] a)
Flat Duration: 0 s; Flat Charge: 0; Unit Duration: 60 s; Unit Charge: 10
Charge
40
30
20
10
Waiting time before the call duration counter starts
60 s
Duration
b)
Flat Duration: 0 s; Flat Charge: 100; Unit Duration: 60 s; Unit Charge: 10
Charge
140
130
120
110
Waiting time before the call duration counter starts
60 s
Duration
c)
Flat Duration: 0 s*; Flat Charge: 10; Unit Duration: 0 s*; Unit Charge: 0
* In this case, Flat Duration and Unit Duration could be any value.
Charge
10
Waiting time before the call duration counter starts
Duration
d)
Flat Duration: 60 s; Flat Charge: 10; Unit Duration: 0 s; Unit Charge: 100
Charge
110
Waiting time before the call duration counter starts
10
60 s
Duration
• Flat Charges and Unit Charges for each call charge rate (Peak/Off Peak/Economy) consist of up to 7 digits excluding the decimal point (e.g., 12345.67).
Feature Guide 165
1.20 Administrative Information Features
• The charge of a call can consist of no more than 7 digits. For example, if the number of decimal places
(
Decimal Places [190]) is set to 3, the maximum call charge will be calculated as 9 999.999 even if
the actual charge exceeds this.
•
To log the charge of calls on SMDR, "With Charge" must be selected in Call Charge Information SMDR
• It is possible to control whether "Dial number" is shown by Call Log Printout (
User Manual References
3.2.2 Changing Call Logs and Call Charges
166 Feature Guide
1.21 Extension Controlling Features
1.21 Extension Controlling Features
1.21.1 Extension Feature Clear
Description
Extension users can simultaneously clear all of the following features set on their own telephone:
Feature
Absent Message
Automatic Callback Busy
Background Music (BGM)
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Data Line Security
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Executive Busy Override Deny
Hot Line
Log-in/Log-out
Message Waiting
Paging Deny
Room Monitor
Timed Reminder
Voice Mail Integration
Off
Off
Off
Off
Allow
Disable
Off
Off
Value after Extension Feature Clear
Allow
The stored telephone numbers will be cleared.
Log-in
All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.
Allow
Off
Cleared
Off
This feature is also known as Station Feature Clear or Station Programme Clear.
User Manual References
1.7.8 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
Feature Guide 167
1.21 Extension Controlling Features
1.21.2 Timed Reminder
Description
Each extension user can set an alarm to be used as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate daily or one time only. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, a special dial tone
(dial tone 3) will be heard.
Remote Timed Reminder
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely set, cancel, and confirm the timed reminder of the desired extension. This feature is useful, for example, for a small hotel or motel to set a wake-up call for an extension in a guest room, or for a parent to set a wake-up call for an extension in a child's room.
Conditions
• Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time.
• Setting a new alarm time clears the previous alarm time.
• There is no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed Reminder at the same time.
User Manual References
1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
2.1.3 Setting an Alarm for Other Extensions (Remote Timed Reminder [Wake-up Call])
168 Feature Guide
1.22 Audible Tone Features
1.22 Audible Tone Features
1.22.1 Dial Tone
Description
The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions:
Type
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Description
A normal dial tone is heard when none of the features listed for dial tones 2 through 5 have been set.
Heard when any of the following features is set.
• Absent Message
• Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones [PTs] only)
• Call Forwarding (FWD)
• Call Pickup Deny
• Data Line Security
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Extension Lock
• Hot Line (for single line telephones [SLTs] only)
• Message Waiting (for PTs only)
• Remote Extension Lock
• Timed Reminder
Heard when any of the following features is performed.
• Account Code Entry
• Answering a call from Timed Reminder
• Going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting
Heard when going off-hook if new voice messages have been recorded (Built-in
Voice Message [BV]).
Heard when going off-hook if the remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or if 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice
Message [BV]).
Conditions
•
Dial Tone Type for ARS/Account Code Entry (Verify-Toll mode only)
Through system programming, it is possible to select the dial tone type for the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)/Account Code Entry (Verify-Toll mode only) feature (
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 169
1.22 Audible Tone Features
1.22.2 Confirmation Tone
Description
At the end of a feature operation, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user.
Type
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Description
Sent when the setting is accepted, or sent when the Extension Lock feature is set or cancelled.
Sent when the new setting is identical to the previous one, or sent when certain features are successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic
Callback Busy).
Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features:
• Call Pickup
• Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number
• Conference
• Paging/Paging Answer
Conditions
• It is possible to eliminate confirmation tone 3 (except for Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number) through system programming (
Call Pickup Tone [117], Conference Tone [105], External Pager
Feature Guide References
170 Feature Guide
Section 2
System Configuration and Administration
Features
Feature Guide 171
2.1 System Configuration—Hardware
2.1
System Configuration—Hardware
2.1.1
Extension Jack Configuration
Description
Extension jacks are used to connect proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Direct
Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) to the PBX.
Conditions
•
PT and SLT in Parallel Mode
A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack and used in parallel mode.
•
DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system programming (
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003], Console Paired Telephone [004]). Each
extension jack number should be unique.
•
Automatic Detection
A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack with no programming required.
172 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2
System Configuration—Software
2.2.1
Class of Service (COS)
Description
Each extension is assigned a class of service (COS) number (
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]).
The following features operate differently depending on an extension's COS.
a)
TRS (
b)
Walking COS (
Conditions
•
Walking COS
An extension user can make a call from an extension with a lower COS by using his or her own COS temporarily.
User Manual References
1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)
Feature Guide 173
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.2
Group
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1.
Outside (CO) Line Group
Outside (CO) lines can be grouped into 8 outside (CO) line groups based on properties such as carrier or outside (CO) line type (
Each outside (CO) line can belong to only one outside (CO) line group.
2.
Extension Group
Extensions can be grouped into 8 extension groups (
Each extension group can have the following attribute set:
a)
Call Pickup Group
b)
Paging Group
c)
Idle Extension Hunting Group
d)
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group
e)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group
Every extension must belong to one extension group and cannot belong to more than one extension group.
Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephones (PTs)/single line telephones (SLTs)
[Example]
Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4
Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 Extn. 108
2.1.
Call Pickup Group
Using the Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which they belong.
2.2.
Paging Group
Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group, or answer a page made to any group.
2.3.
Idle Extension Hunting Group
If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same extension group (
Hunting Group Set [100]). When calls are received, idle
extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type (
Type [101]): Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting.
2.4.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group
A UCD group is a group of extensions that receives UCD calls directed to the group (
[520]). To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired
outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
174 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.5.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group
A DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All extensions in the group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination (
AA [501]) ring simultaneously. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution
method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and
"With AA" must be selected as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature (
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]).
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
Feature Guide 175
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.3
Time Service
Description
Time service modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of day. For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice
Processing System (VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long-distance calls during lunch time, etc.
There are 3 time service modes—day, night, and lunch. The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table.
1.
Time Service Switching Mode
The current time service mode can switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time service modes manually.
Whether time service modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system programming (
Time Service Switching Mode [006]).
Switching Mode
Automatic
Manual
Description Condition
The current time service mode will switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table, and can be switched manually by pressing the Day, Night, or Lunch button or by entering the Time Service feature number.
The current time service mode will switch only when the Day, Night, or Lunch button is pressed or when the Time Service feature number is entered.
The current time service mode (day/night/lunch) and the switching mode
(automatic/manual) can be switched manually by an extension assigned as the operator or manager extension.
2.
Time Table
A Time Table has 3 modes—day, night, and lunch. A Time Table can be programmed to control when each time service mode starts (and therefore, the previous time service mode ends), and can be programmed separately for each day of the week.
[Programming Example: Time Table]
Time Schedule*
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
(Cont.) :
:
Day
Start Time
Not Stored
09:00
09:00
:
:
Night
Start Time
Not Stored
17:00
17:00
:
:
Start Time
Not Stored
12:00
12:00
:
:
Lunch
End Time
Not Stored
13:00
13:00
:
:
*
176 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
[Visualisation of Time Schedule]
Monday
Time Table
00:00 03:00 06:00 09:00 12:00
Day Lunch Day
Day Lunch
Night
Night
15:00 18:00 21:00
Night
00:00
Tuesday
Note that time service modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur in the morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time service modes need to be used in a time schedule. Also note that day mode or night mode resumes automatically when lunch mode ends.
3.
Programming Items Using Time Service
The following programming items will be affected by the time service:
a)
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
b)
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
c)
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
d)
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
e)
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
f)
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
g)
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
h)
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
i)
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
j)
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]
4.
Day/Night/Lunch Button
A flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can customised as a Day, Night, or Lunch button by the operator or manager.
These buttons can be used to switch the current time service mode.
Each button shows the current status as follows:
Off
Red on
Light Pattern Status
Day/Night/Lunch off
Day/Night/Lunch on
Note
Extension users can press the "#" key on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current time service mode.
Conditions
• The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode can be specified through system programming (
Time Service Start Time [007]).
Feature Guide 177
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
1.7.7 Checking the Time Service Mode
2.1.2 Switching the Time Service Mode (Time Service)
178 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.4
Operator/Manager Features
Description
This PBX supports one operator and one manager. Any extension can be designated as the operator through system programming (
Operator Assignment [008]). The operator is the destination of Operator
Call. The extension connected to extension jack 01 is the manager extension. An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension is allowed to use certain features that most extensions cannot, as follows:
Manager
Password*
Required
Feature
Manager
Programming
Description
Sets the System Speed
Dialling number.
Sets the System Speed
Dialling name.
Sets the DISA security code.
Required
Required
Sets the number of digits for the DISA security code.
Call Log Printout for Each
Extension
Prints and clears call logs for each extension.
Call Charge
Management
Sets, displays, clears, and prints the call charge data.
Required
Required
Required
Details in
–
Extension
Password Set
Remote Extension Lock
Time Service
Sets the extension password. This password is used for the Walking COS feature and the Remote
Extension Lock feature.
Each extension's password should be unique.
Required
Sets or cancels Extension
Lock on an extension remotely.
Not required
Switches the time service mode manually.
Not required
Remote Timed Reminder (Wake-up
Call)
Sets or cancels Timed
Reminder to any extension remotely.
Not required
Incoming Call Log in the Common
Area—CLEAR ALL
Clears all Caller ID information stored in the common area.
Not required
Feature Guide 179
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Feature
Incoming Call Log Display Lock in the Common Area
Description
Locks or unlocks the
Incoming Call Log for the common area.
Manager
Password*
Not required
Details in
301st Incoming Call Logged in the
Common Area
Selects how new calls are treated when Incoming Call
Log for the common area is full.
Not required
Outgoing Message (OGM) for
DISA/UCD
Date and Time Setting
Records and plays back
OGMs used by DISA,
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD), and 3-level
Automated Attendant (AA).
Erases OGMs used by
DISA and UCD.
Not required
Adjusts the current date and time.
Not required
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
Cancels Extension Lock,
Incoming Call Log Display
Lock in the Personal Area, and Message Waiting for
Another Extension Lock at all extensions.
Not required
LCS Password Control
Clears the Live Call
Screening (LCS) password.
Not required
–
Common BV OGM
Records, plays back, and erases a common BV OGM in the common message area that can be accessed by either the operator or manager.
Not required
* The system password may be entered instead of the extension password for the manager (manager password).
Operator Call
An extension user can call the operator by entering the Operator Call number (
Access number is assigned to "0" through system programming, the Operator Call number will be changed to "9".
Note
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
180 Feature Guide
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
2.1 Control Features
3.2.2 Changing Call Logs and Call Charges
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Feature Guide 181
2.3 System Data Control
2.3
System Data Control
2.3.1
PC Programming
Description
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance
Console software as well as by using a proprietary telephone (PT) (
programming and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site programming or remote programming.
1.
On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to the PBX.
2.
Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the
PBX via an outside (CO) line.
1.
Connection Methods for On-site Programming
Method Description
Serial Interface
(RS-232C)
USB
The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface (RS-
232C) port of the PBX.
The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of the PBX.
2.
Connection Methods for Remote Programming
Required
Hardware
—
—
Method Description
Required
Hardware
Remote modem
Call the PBX and have the call directed to the internal modem using one of the following methods:
User-supplied modem
Direct Access: Using a modem, dial the telephone number to connect to the internal modem. To use this feature, "MODEM" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
DISA: Using a telephone, dial the telephone number to reach the DISA line (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)).
After hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM), enter the
Remote Maintenance feature number to access the internal modem. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
Call Transfer: Using a telephone, call an extension user, such as the operator, to request to be transferred to the internal modem using the Remote Maintenance feature number (
182 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
Conditions
• Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied to a second party who tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT.
• System programming can be performed either in interactive or batch mode.
• System Password
To access system programming in interactive mode, a valid password must be entered. The password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming (
• A user can upload system programming data from a PC to the PBX or download it from the PBX to a
PC.
• If communications between the PBX and PC fail before completing Firmware Upgrade or system programming data upload from a PC to the PBX, the successfully transferred portion of the data can still be used.
• Firmware Upgrade can be performed only through on-site programming using the Serial Interface (RS-
232C) port or USB port.
Installation Manual References
3.2.1 Connection
3.2.3 Accessing PBX via Internal Modem
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 183
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.2
PT Programming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customise the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the following programming features:
Programming Type Description
Personal
Programming
Used by an extension user to customise the extension's settings.
System Programming
Used by an authorised party to customise the PBX.
Manager
Programming
Used by the manager to customise 4 system programming settings of the
PBX, set a password to each extension, print out call log information for each extension, and programme call charges.
Example
Authorised
Programmer
Extension user One-touch Dialling,
Line Preference—
Outgoing, etc.
System Password,
Extension Number, etc.
Authorised administrator
System Speed Dialling
Number, Extension
Password Set, Call Log
Printout for Each
Extension, Call Charge
Management etc.
Manager
Conditions
• The manager extension is the extension that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack (jack 01) of the
PBX and can therefore perform manager programming.
• Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is permitted at a time. These 2 programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by 2 users.
• During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls.
•
System Password
To access system programming, the administrator system password must be entered. The system password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming (
[002]). The administrator can programme all system programming.
•
Manager Password
To set the manager password, it is necessary to use the system password to perform Extension
Password Set. Once set, the manager password can be used to access manager programming.
The manager can assign a password to each extension (extension password).
•
Personal Programming Data Reset
A PT user can simultaneously reset all settings made through personal programming (Line
Preference—Incoming/Outgoing, Call Waiting Tone Type Selection, etc.) to their default settings.
This feature also cancels pressing the AUTO ANS/MUTE button in the Hands-free Answerback feature and the Room Monitor feature.
•
System Programming Data Reset
The PBX can return all or specific settings made through system programming to their default settings based on the following parameters (
a)
All para: All data
b)
System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para", and "DSS para"
c)
CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line
d)
Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension
184 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control e)
DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable
Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console
f)
Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number
[001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011]
Installation Manual References
2.10.1 Starting the Advanced Hybrid System
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
User Manual References
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges
3.3 Customising Your PBX (System Programming)
Feature Guide 185
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.3
Automatic Time Adjustment
Description
The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically according to the time information received from your telephone company. Time information can be received when an incoming call with Caller ID that includes time information is received.
The PBX clock will be adjusted every day with the first call after 3:05 A.M., if enabled through system programming (
Automatic Time Adjustment [152]).
Note
Since the PBX clock is put ahead by one hour on the Summer Time start date, a timed reminder set within one hour of the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will not ring.
Since the PBX clock is put back by one hour on the Summer Time end date, a timed reminder set within one hour before the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will ring 2 times.
Conditions
• SMDR will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the end of Summer Time (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature).
Feature Guide References
186 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.4
Feature Numbering
Description
To call another extension user or to access PBX features, access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required.
Feature numbers are available while:
1.
a dial tone is heard
2.
a busy tone or Do Not Disturb (DND) tone is heard
3.
dialling or talking
4.
on-hook
1.
Feature Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
Extension numbers and features that are available while a dial tone is heard have fixed numbers and flexible numbers respectively, shown in the following table:
a)
Extension Numbers:
The extension numbering plan can be selected through system programming (
When the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change automatically as follows*:
Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 101 through 124
Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 11 through 34
If a rotary single line telephone (SLT) is used at any extension, select "Plan 1".
Note
* For United Kingdom and New Zealand, when the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change automatically as follows:
Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 201 through 224
Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 24—extension numbers 21 through 44
b)
Feature Numbers:
When "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected, feature numbers starting with "7" are useable with and without "#" added before "7".
[Example]
The default feature number for setting "Do Not Disturb (DND)" is "714#". "714#" and "#714#" are both available for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3".
To make them easier to remember, it may be helpful to replace the new feature numbers for "Plan
2" and "Plan 3" with the code numbers 50 through 59, through system programming (
Feature Numbering Plan [012]).
Feature Guide 187
2.3 System Data Control
[Feature Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
Feature
Absent Message (set/cancel)
Account Code Entry for an SLT
Automatic Line Access (Local Access)* 1
Built-in Voice Message (BV) (record/play/ erase)
Call Forwarding (FWD)—All Calls, Busy/No
Answer (set/cancel)
Call Hold (Hold Mode 2 or 3) for an SLT* 2
Call Hold Retrieve for outside (CO) line calls/ intercom calls
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve*
3
Call Pickup Deny (set/cancel)
Call Waiting for intercom calls/doorphone calls (set/cancel)
Call Waiting for outside (CO) line calls (set/ cancel)
Common BV Outgoing Message (OGM)
(record/play/erase)
Conference (5-party)
Plan 1
Numbering
Plan 2 Plan 3
75
or 49
9/0
725
71
Additional Number
(1–6 [+ parameter]/
0) + #/0 account code + outside phone no.
outside phone no.
([1 + extn. no.]/2/0) +
#/0
([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/
0) + #/0
20
53/5
22/52
22
72
732
731
722
#20
#59/#5
#22/#56
#22
outside (CO) line no.
(1–8)/extn. no.
0–9
(1/0) + #/0
(1/0) + #/0
(1/0) + #/0
01–24 + (1/2/0) + #/0
Data Line Security (set/cancel)
Directed Call Pickup
Do Not Disturb (DND) (set/cancel)
Doorphone Call/Door Open
Executive Busy Override Deny (set/cancel)
Extension Lock (set/cancel)
4
31/55
730
#41
71
733
77
#31/#55
(phone no. + CONF)
4 times + CONF
(1/0) + #/0 extn. no.
(4/0) + #/0
1–4* 4
(0/1) + #/0
0000–9999 (2 times/ one time) + #/0
Extension Number* 5
External Feature Access (EFA) for an SLT
Extension Feature Clear
FWD—Follow Me (set/cancel)
FWD to BV (set/cancel)
100–199 100–499
6
79
71
71
10–49
#/0
(5/8) + extn. no. + #/
0
([1 or 2 + 725]/0) + #/
0
188 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
Feature
FWD to Outside (CO) Line (set/cancel)
Plan 1
Numbering
Plan 2 Plan 3
71
71
Additional Number
(3 + outside (CO) line access no. + outside phone no. +
#)/(0 + #/0)
([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/
0) + #/0
FWD to Voice Processing System (VPS)
(set/cancel)
Group Call Pickup
Hot Line for an SLT (programme)
Hot Line for an SLT (set/cancel)
Incoming Call Log in the Personal Area—
CLEAR ALL
Incoming Call Log in the Common Area—
CLEAR ALL
Last Number Redial for an SLT
Live Call Screening (LCS) Password (set/ cancel)
Log-in/Log-out
Logging of Caller ID Information in the
Common Area (set/cancel)
Logging of Caller ID Information in the
Personal Area (set/cancel)
Message Waiting (leave/cancel for a caller)
40
## or 80
Message Waiting (cancel all for a called extension)
Message Waiting (cancel all for another extension)
Message Waiting Answer
Message Waiting for Another Extension
Lock (set/cancel)
Operator Call
Outside (CO) Line Group Access
70
70
74
74
77
0/9
8
### or 80
736
738
738
70
70
70
784
70
#40
2 + phone no. + #
(1/0) + #/0
#
#
000–999 (2 times/ one time) + #
(0/1) + #/0
(2/0) + #/0
(1/0) + #/0
(1/2) + extn. no. + #/
0
0 + #/0
3 + extn. no. + #
#/0
4000–9999 (2 times/ one time) + #/0
Paging—All Extensions & External
Paging—All Extensions/Group
Paging—External
Paging Answer
Paging Deny (set/cancel)
33
33
34
43
734
#33
#33
#34
#43
1–8 + outside phone no.
or 9
0/1–8
(1/0) + #
Feature Guide 189
2.3 System Data Control
Personal BV OGM (record/play/erase)
Personal Speed Dialling (confirm)
Personal Speed Dialling (dial)
Personal Speed Dialling (programme)
Remote Maintenance
Remote Timed Reminder (set/cancel/ confirm)
Room Monitor (set/cancel)
Room Monitor through a doorphone
System Speed Dialling for an SLT (dial)
Timed Reminder (set/cancel)
Timed Reminder (confirm)
Time Service (set/cancel)
Walking COS
Feature
21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal
Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite the oldest call)
301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common
Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite the oldest call)
Plan 1
Numbering
Plan 2 Plan 3
723
1 or #
3
1 or ##
2
729
764
31
735
76
76
78
7
737
#31
Additional Number
(1/2/0) + #/0
0–9 + #
0–9
0–9 + phone no. + # extn. no. + # + 76 +
([hhmm + parameter]* 6 /2/3) +
#
(1/0) + #
1–4* 4
00–99
([hhmm + parameter]* 6 /2) + #/
0
3 + #
([1–3]/0) + # extn. password + the user's extn. no. + #/0
(0/1) + #
737
(2/3) + #
*
1
*
2
For New Zealand: 1 or 9
For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 50; Plan 2/Plan 3: #50
*
3
*
*
4
5
For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 36/56; Plan 2/Plan 3: #36/#56
When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or
"2") as the doorphone/door opener number.
For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–
499, Plan 3: 20–49
* 6 hh: hour (01–12), mm: minute (00–59), AM/PM (0/1), one time/daily (1/2)
2.
Feature Numbering (available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard)
Features that are available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Feature Numbering Table (available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard)]
190 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
Feature
Automatic Callback Busy
Busy Station Signalling (BSS)/DND Override
Executive Busy Override
Numbering
6
2
3
3.
Feature Numbering (available while dialling or talking)
Features that are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Feature Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)]
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
Feature
Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM)
Conference (3-party) for an SLT
Door Open
Pulse to Tone Conversion* 3
Numbering
4*
1
3* 2
5
#
* 1
Dial after dialling the TAM's extension number and hearing its busy tone.
* 2
Plan 1: 3; Plan 2/Plan 3: #3
* 3
This feature is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
4.
Feature Numbering (available while on-hook)
Features that are available while on-hook have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Feature Numbering Table (available while on-hook)]
Feature
Background Music (BGM) set/cancel
Time Service mode display
Extension number and extension name display/ date (month [day]/day [month]) and time display/ date (month [day]/day [month]/year/day of the week) display changing
Numbering
1
#
Conditions
• If a feature number includes " " or "#" except for those that can use "0" instead of "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it.
•
Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Certain feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call
Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0".
Feature Guide 191
2.3 System Data Control
User Manual References
4.2.1 Feature Number Table
192 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.5
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
Description
The dialling mode (DTMF [Dual Tone Multi-Frequency]/Pulse) of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed
[402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) line is Call Blocking. Automatic
Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about Quick
Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC).
Conditions
• If no outside (CO) lines are connected to the outside (CO) line ports of the PBX, the default values are assigned automatically.
• It takes a maximum of 4 minutes to complete checking the dialling mode, unless the outside (CO) line is in use. In this case, the PBX will start checking it after the outside (CO) line becomes idle.
• This feature will not function properly when:
– It takes 3 seconds or more to detect the dialling mode of your telephone company.
– The cable from the outside (CO) line is disconnected while the PBX is checking the dialling mode.
• If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority:
DTMF Pulse (High) Pulse (Low)
• Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
Installation Manual References
4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 193
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.6
Country Setting
Description
The country code of the PBX can be selected through system programming ( Country [995]). The PBX will restart with the default settings of the user's country/area. During this operation, communication between the PBX and PC will be disconnected one time. Country Setting can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance
Console on a PC).
Conditions
• This feature is only available when the suffix of the connected PBX is "NE" or "CE".
194 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.7
Firmware Upgrade
Description
It is possible to upgrade the PBX software via the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port or USB port using the KX-
TE Maintenance Console software. Even if a user upgrades the PBX software, the system data will not be lost. For more information on how to upgrade the PBX software, refer to the on-line help.
Conditions
• The ROM and the firmware version can be confirmed through system programming (
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
Feature Guide 195
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.1
Power Failure Transfer
Description
If the power supply to the PBX fails, specific single line telephones (SLTs) are automatically connected to specific outside (CO) lines (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only outside (CO) line calls handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.
Conditions
• During a power failure, each of the following outside (CO) lines will be connected to an assigned extension.
Outside (CO) line 1: extension jack 01
Outside (CO) line 4: extension jack 09
Outside (CO) line 7: extension jack 17
• Only outside (CO) line calls are possible during a power failure. All other features will not function.
• We recommend connecting an SLT in parallel at extension jacks 01, 09, and 17, so that the SLT can be used during a power failure.
Note that if the parallelled SLT is on an outside (CO) line call when the power is restored, that call will be disconnected.
• Automobile-type batteries, which must be user-supplied, can be connected as a system backup power supply to operate all the features during a power failure.
The batteries can be connected directly to the unit with optional cables. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual.
Installation Manual References
2.2.6 Connecting Backup Batteries
2.9 Power Failure Connections
Feature Guide References
196 Feature Guide
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.2
Power Failure Restart
Description
When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts and automatically loads stored data.
Conditions
• In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy (
1.12.2 Call Park), and Redial (
Feature Guide 197
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
198 Feature Guide
Section 3
Programming Instructions
Feature Guide 199
3.1 Introduction
3.1
Introduction
3.1.1
Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. The PBX has default settings that can be changed to meet your needs. These settings control the manner in which the PBX features described in this Feature Guide function, and changing these settings is referred to as "system programming". System programming can be performed by only one person at a time. A second person attempting to programme the system will be denied access to system programming.
Ways to Programme
There are 2 programming methods:
•
PC Programming
PC programming is described in Section 3.2 PC Programming.
•
PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
PT programming is described in Section 3.3 PT Programming. An authorised administrator or the
manager can perform system programming by entering 3-digit programming numbers with a PT.
Password Security
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. When KX-TE
Maintenance Console is started for the first time, the Quick Setup utility will ask you to set the system password. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password.
Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1.
Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it becomes known to others.
2.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the password.
3.
We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4.
Please change the password periodically.
5.
If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files.
Note
This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.
200 Feature Guide
3.2 PC Programming
3.2
PC Programming
3.2.1
Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console
To programme and administer the PBX by PC (Personal Computer), you need to install KX-TE Maintenance
Console onto the PC. To install and start KX-TE Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC). KX-
TE Maintenance Console starts the programme using the drive where you installed the software automatically.
System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
Minimum Hardware Requirements
• CPU: 300 MHz Intel Celeron microprocessor
• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
• RAM: 128 MB of available RAM
Feature Guide 201
3.3 PT Programming
3.3
PT Programming
3.3.1
Programming Instructions
Required Telephone
PBX settings can be customised through system programming by using a proprietary telephone (PT) with a display, such as the KX-T7730. An authorised administrator or the manager extension connected to extension jack 01 can access system programming.
Only one system programming session can be performed at a time; that is, only one user can access system programming at a time. This includes PC programming.
Buttons and Functions
Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function
PREV (PREVIOUS)
NEXT
–
–
SECRET
STORE
PAUSE
PROGRAM
END
SELECT
202 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function
FLASH
CLEAR
Entering System Programming Mode
Using a PT to perform system programming allows an authorised administrator to set a wide range of PBX features and parameters. To enter system programming mode, the system password is required. With the system password, all system programming is accessible.
#
System Password for
Administrator —for PT Programming
1234
Programming No.
3 digits
Note
means default value throughout these programming instructions.
Entering Manager Programming Mode
Using a PT to perform manager programming allows the manager extension (extension jack 01) to set certain PBX features and parameters. To enter manager programming mode, the extension password for the manager (manager password) is required.
With the manager password, the following 4 system programming settings are accessible:
•
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
•
System Speed Dialling Name [011]
•
•
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
#
Extension Password for Manager
—for PT Programming
Programming No.
3 digits
Notes
• The system password may be entered instead of the manager password.
• With the manager password, the manager can also set a password to each extension, print out call log information for each extension, and programme call charges. For more information on how to assign a password to each extension including the manager password and to print out call log information for each extension, refer to the User Manual ( 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using
Programming Mode, 3.2.2 Changing Call Logs and Call Charges).
Feature Guide 203
3.3 PT Programming
Entering Characters
The PT's dialling buttons can be used to enter characters when storing a name or message. The following tables depict the available characters:
Table 1 (Alphabet mode)/Table 2 (Numeral mode)
* This character is only available with the CE (Central Europe) and PD (Poland) models, when programming
204 Feature Guide
Table 3 (Cyrillic alphabet mode for RU [Russia]/UA [Ukraine] model)
3.3 PT Programming
* This character is only available for the KX-T7735RU.
[Example of Entering Characters]
To enter "Ann":
n
A
2
6
(5 times)
OR
n
6
(5 times)
Notes
• To toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" or between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic
alphabet mode (assignable only in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] )", and "Numeral mode", press
SELECT.
• To move the cursor right, press .
• To delete all characters, press CLEAR. To delete a character, press .
Feature Guide 205
3.3 PT Programming
P
S
L
O
I
E
G
List of Abbreviations
A
B
C
D
T
U
V
CPC
DIL
DISA
DND
DRD
DSS
DTMF
EFA
AA
APT
ARS
BGM
BV
CO
COS
GRP
IRNA
LCS
OGM
PT
SLT
SMDR
SMS
TAM
TRS
UCD
VM
Automated Attendant
Analogue Proprietary Telephone
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Built-in Voice Message
Outside (CO) Line
Class of Service
Calling Party Control
Direct In Line
Direct Inward System Access
Do Not Disturb
Distinctive Ring Detection
Direct Station Selection
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
External Feature Access
Group
Intercept Routing—No Answer
Live Call Screening
Outgoing Message
Proprietary Telephone
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
Short Message Service
Telephone Answering Machine
Toll Restriction
Uniform Call Distribution
Voice Mail
206 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.2
Programming Procedures
Notes
• means default value throughout these programming instructions.
• means to select "All", except when setting the charge in Call Charge Calculation related programming items where it means "Decimal point".
• The following are displayed when you store a number, such as a telephone number, or feature number:
P: PAUSE; -: CONF; F: FLASH/RECALL; [ ]: INTERCOM x: PAUSE (substitutes for any number [i.e., wild card])
• To return to the previous programming item, press .
• To correct a wrong entry, press CLEAR and then enter the new input.
• To delete a stored parameter, press CLEAR, enter the new input, and then press STORE.
• Press or to scroll the display.
• Some programming items cannot have a value left empty.
Date & Time [000]
0
SELECT
0
(Sun…Sat)
0
âžž
NEXT
hour
(1…12)
year
âžž
SELECT
(Jan.…Dec.)
âžž
(00…99)
âžž
minute
âžž
SELECT
(00…59) (AM/PM)
day
(1…31)
STORE
âžž
END
Notes
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• The PBX supports years from 2000 to 2099.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 0 1
NEXT speed dialling no.
phone no.
STORE
(00…99) Max. 32 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature Guide 207
3.3 PT Programming
Notes
• An Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 88) should be included before the phone number. When dialling, a pause will automatically be inserted after the
Outside (CO) Line Access number.
•
When storing an account code assigned in Account Code [310], enter
and the account code after an Outside (CO) Line Access number.
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features
System Password [002]
0 0 2
NEXT password
4-7 digits
(0000…9999999)
1234
STORE END
WARNING
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1.
Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it becomes known to others.
2.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the password.
3.
We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4.
Please change the password periodically.
5.
If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files.
Note
This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.
Feature & Programming References
208 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
0 0 3
NEXT
DSS console no.
extension jack no.
STORE END
(1…2) (02…24/Disable)
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
Notes
• To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
• The same jack number cannot be assigned to 2 DSS Consoles.
• Do not assign extension jack 01 (manager extension) as the DSS Console jack.
•
The extension jack number preassigned as a paired telephone in Console Paired Telephone [004]
should not be assigned in this programme.
Feature & Programming References
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration
Console Paired Telephone [004]
0 0 4
NEXT
DSS console no.
extension jack no.
STORE END
(1…2) (01…24/Disable)
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
Notes
• To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
•
The extension jack number preassigned as a DSS Console in DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
should not be assigned in this programme.
• An SLT cannot be paired with the DSS Console.
Feature & Programming References
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]
0 0 5
END NEXT SELECT
(With Transfer/
Without Transfer)
STORE
Feature Guide 209
3.3 PT Programming
Note
With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call.
Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button, then the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call.
Feature & Programming References
Time Service Switching Mode [006]
0 0 6
NEXT SELECT STORE
(Manual/Automatic)
Feature & Programming References
END
Time Service Start Time [007]
0 0 7
NEXT NEXT
or
PREV
(Sun
…Sat) or
SELECT
(Every day) (Day/Night/
Lunch-start/
Lunch-end)
âžž
To go to another day of the week
To go to another mode
hour
(1…12) or
*
âžž
minute
(00…59)
âžž
STORE
(AM/PM)
To keep the settings unchanged, keep pressing SELECT until "None" is displayed
END
Notes
•
This programme is available when switching mode is enabled in automatic mode in Time Service
• * Pressing SELECT shows the previous entry. When the display shows "None", press SELECT to set the start time.
Feature & Programming References
Operator Assignment [008]
0 0 8
NEXT extension jack no.
STORE END
(01…24/Disable)
210 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Note
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
Feature & Programming References
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
Extension Number [009]
0 0 9
NEXT
SELECT
(Plan 1/2/3)
STORE
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.
extension no.
(01…24)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Notes
• Programmable extension numbers are as follows:
Plan 1: 100–199; Plan 2: 100–499; Plan 3: 10–49
(for United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–499, Plan 3:
20–49)
• The same extension number cannot be entered for 2 different extension jacks.
Feature & Programming References
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
LCD Time Display [010]
0 1 0
NEXT SELECT
(12/24 h)
STORE END
Note
The following settings and features use 12-hour format even if 24-hour format is assigned in this programme:
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Feature Guide 211
3.3 PT Programming
System Speed Dialling Name [011]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 1 1
NEXT speed dialling no.
name*
STORE END
(00…99) Max.
16 characters
To continue
SELECT
Note
* A name can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]
0 1 2
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue code no.
(50…59)
feature no.
STORE
Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
This programme is available only when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009].
Feature & Programming References
212 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]
0 1 3
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue location no.
(1…9)
feature no.
Max. 24 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Notes
• Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for
Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function.
• This feature is not available when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a PT.
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Hunting Group Set [100]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 0
NEXT extension group no.
name*
STORE END
(1…8/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
Hunting Type [101]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 1
NEXT extension group no.
name*
STORE END
(1…8/ )
(Terminate/
Circular)
To continue
SELECT
Note
This programme is available when the extension group is enabled in Hunting Group Set [100].
Feature Guide 213
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
DTMF Integration Port [102]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 2
NEXT extension jack no.
name*
STORE END
(07, 08, 15, 16/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
DTMF Integration [103]
1 0 3
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Note
When a KX-TVP series VPS is connected to the PBX, to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration between
the VPS and the PBX, select "Plan 1" or "Plan 2" in Extension Number [009] and "Enable" in this
programme.
Feature & Programming References
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
SLT Hold Mode [104]
1 0 4
NEXT SELECT
(Hold-1/Hold-2/
Hold-3)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
Conference Tone [105]
1 0 5
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
END
END
214 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
External Pager Access Tone [106]
1 0 6
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
DTMF Receiver Check [107]
END
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 7
NEXT
DTMF receiver no.
name*
STORE END
(1…6/ )
(Enable/Disable)
Note
This programme enables each DTMF receiver to check whether it is operating normally or not.
DTMF receiver number:
1–2: checking extension jacks 01–08
3–4: checking extension jacks 09–16
5–6: checking extension jacks 17–24
Installation Manual References
4.1.3 Operation
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]
1 0 8
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Note
This programme enables a locked extension to send a flash/recall signal during a conversation with an outside party.
CO Indicator [109]
1 0 9
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Note
This programme is available for the extension(s) assigned not to ring in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410], to answer incoming outside (CO) line calls.
Feature Guide 215
3.3 PT Programming
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110]
1 1 0
NEXT SELECT STORE
(MODE1: EFA mode/
MODE2: Flash/Recall mode)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Music on Hold [111]
1 1 1
NEXT SELECT
(Internal/
External/Tone)
STORE
Note
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
Feature & Programming References
DSS Lamp Mode [112]
1 1 2
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE
END
END
END
Note
Enable: FWD—Flashing slowly, DND—Flashing at moderate speed
Disable: FWD—Off, DND—Off
Feature & Programming References
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]
1 1 3
NEXT SELECT
(0/3/10/
15 times)
Feature & Programming References
STORE END
216 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Automatic Redial Interval [114]
1 1 4
NEXT SELECT
(40/60 s)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]
1 1 5
NEXT SELECT
(Single/Double/
Triple)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
STORE
END
END
Conference Pattern [116]
1 1 6
NEXT SELECT
(3-party C-0 E-3/
3-party C-1 E-3/
3-party C-2 E-3/
5-party C-2 E-5)
STORE END
Note
3-party C-0 E-3: No outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call.
3-party C-1 E-3: One outside party can attend a 3-party conference call.
3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call.
5-party C-2 E-5: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party to 5-party conference call.
The PBX allows up to 2 outside parties to participate in a conference call. [C: CO, E: Extension]
Feature & Programming References
Call Pickup Tone [117]
1 1 7
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE END
Feature Guide 217
3.3 PT Programming
Pulse Restriction [118]
1 1 8
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Notes
• It is programmable whether pulse dialling is sent or not to the telephone company during a
conversation with an outside party when "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode is enabled in Dial Mode
• This programme is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]
1 1 9
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Note
This programme is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
Feature & Programming References
Bell Frequency [120]
1 2 0
NEXT SELECT
(20/25 Hz)
STORE END
Note
This programme selects the bell frequency sent to an SLT.
Automatic Line Access [121]
1 2 1
NEXT SELECT
(Dial 0/9)*
Note
* For New Zealand: 1 or 9
STORE END
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]
1 2 2
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
218 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Break Ratio [123]
1 2 3
NEXT SELECT
(MODE1: 66 %/
MODE2: 60 %)
STORE END
Notes
• This programme selects the pulse break ratio (the ratio between the length of the pulse and the length of the pause) when a pulse is sent to the telephone company while dialling a telephone number.
• This programme is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
TRS Check for * and # [125]
1 2 5
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]
1 2 6
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE
END
END
Feature & Programming References
Pickup Group [127]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 2 7
NEXT extension group no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
Feature Guide 219
3.3 PT Programming
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]
1 2 8
NEXT SELECT STORE
(Single 3 s/Single 5 s/
Double 3 s/Double 5 s)
END
Note
This programme selects the ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside
(CO) line calls (including a DISA call).
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
VM 1 APT Port [130]
1 3 0
NEXT SELECT
(Port7/Port7 & 8/
Disable)
STORE END
Notes
• To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired setting.
•
This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103].
Feature & Programming References
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
VM 2 APT Port [131]
1 3 1
NEXT SELECT
(Port15/
Port15 & 16/
Disable)
STORE END
Notes
• To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired setting.
•
This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103].
Feature & Programming References
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
220 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]
1 4 2
NEXT SELECT
(1:2/1:3/1:4)
[On:Off]
STORE END
Note
This programme selects the ratio between the bell signals of an SLT (a set of bell-on and bell-off).
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
1 4 3
NEXT SELECT
(1000…2000 ms)
[100 ms increments]
STORE END
Notes
• This programme selects the length of the bell-on signal of an SLT. This determines the ring tone
pattern for incoming calls to SLTs, combined with the setting in SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142].
• This programme also determines the maximum number of digits of an SLT Caller ID number, when
"DTMF1" or "DTMF2" is selected in SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
1 4 5
NEXT
SMS centre no.
Max. 16 digits
(0…9, , #)
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
STORE
SMS Routing Table—CO [146]
1 4 6
NEXT
END
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8)
STORE
(Disable/1
…
8)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature Guide 221
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 4 7
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24)
SELECT
(Disable/1
…
8)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
Each location 1–8 has a maximum of 8 extensions.
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]
1 5 0
NEXT SELECT STORE
(FSK1 [During ring]/
FSK2 [RP-AS]/
DTMF1 [Immediately]/
DTMF2 [During ring])
Feature & Programming References
END
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]
1 5 1
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE
Feature & Programming References
END
Automatic Time Adjustment [152]
1 5 2
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment
STORE END
222 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Incoming Reverse [153]
1 5 3
NEXT SELECT STORE
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
CO Busy Out [154]
1 5 4
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE
Feature & Programming References
END
END
CO Busy Out Check Time [155]
1 5 5
NEXT hour
(1…12)
âžž
minute
(00…59)
Feature & Programming References
âžž
SELECT
(AM/PM)
STORE
Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 6 1
NEXT location no.
leading no.
STORE END
(00…99) Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
END
Feature Guide 223
3.3 PT Programming
Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183]
1 X X
(62/69/76/83)
62: Table 1
69: Table 2
76: Table 3
83: Table 4
NEXT NEXT
or
PREV
(Sun
…Sat) or
(Every day)
NEXT
or
PREV
âžž
To go to another day of the week
hour
(1…12)
âžž
SELECT
(AM/PM) or
(Every hour)
âžž
SELECT
STORE
(Peak/Off Peak/
Economy)
To go to another hour
END
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/
184]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 X X
(63/70/77/84)
63: Table 1
70: Table 2
77: Table 3
84: Table 4
NEXT location no.
(00…99)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
flat charge
Max. 7 digits
(exc. decimal point)
(0…9, )
âžž
SELECT duration
(0…9999 s)
STORE
To continue
END
224 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/
185]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 X X
(64/71/78/85)
64: Table 1
71: Table 2
78: Table 3
85: Table 4
NEXT location no.
(00…99)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
unit charge
Max. 7 digits
(exc. decimal point)
(0…9, )
âžž
SELECT duration
(0…9999 s)
STORE
To continue
END
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/
179/186]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 X X
(65/72/79/86)
65: Table 1
72: Table 2
79: Table 3
86: Table 4
NEXT location no.
(00…99)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
flat charge
Max. 7 digits
(exc. decimal point)
(0…9, )
âžž
SELECT duration
(0…9999 s)
STORE
To continue
END
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/
180/187]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 X X
(66/73/80/87)
66: Table 1
73: Table 2
80: Table 3
87: Table 4
NEXT location no.
(00…99)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
unit charge
Max. 7 digits
(exc. decimal point)
(0…9, )
âžž
SELECT duration
(0…9999 s)
STORE
To continue
END
Feature Guide 225
3.3 PT Programming
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/
181/188]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 X X
(67/74/81/88)
67: Table 1
74: Table 2
81: Table 3
88: Table 4
NEXT location no.
(00…99)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
flat charge
Max. 7 digits
(exc. decimal point)
(0…9, )
âžž
SELECT duration
(0…9999 s)
STORE
To continue
END
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/
182/189]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 X X
(68/75/82/89)
68: Table 1
75: Table 2
82: Table 3
89: Table 4
NEXT location no.
(00…99)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
unit charge
Max. 7 digits
(exc. decimal point)
(0…9, )
âžž
SELECT duration
(0…9999 s)
STORE
To continue
END
Decimal Places [190]
1 9 0
NEXT no. of digits
(0…6)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
Hold Recall Time [200]
2 0 0
NEXT SELECT
(30 s/
1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/
Disable)
STORE
STORE
END
END
226 Feature Guide
Feature & Programming References
Transfer Recall Time [201]
2 0 1
NEXT SELECT
(15/30 s/
1/2 min)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]
2 0 2
NEXT SELECT
(5/10/15/
20 s delay)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]
2 0 3
NEXT SELECT
(0…4 s)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
Call Duration Counter Start [204]
2 0 4
NEXT SELECT STORE
(5/10/15/20/25/30/35/
40/45/50 s after dialling/
Instantly)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]
2 0 5
NEXT
time
(1…32 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
STORE
END
END
END
END
END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 227
3.3 PT Programming
Dialling Start Time [206]
2 0 6
NEXT SELECT
Refer to the note.*
STORE END
Note
* The minimum length of time that the PBX waits after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling that can be selected depends on your country/area as follows:
For Czech Republic: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 3500 ms
For Others: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 1500 ms
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
2 0 7
NEXT SELECT STORE
(MODE1: 50-180 ms/
MODE2: 80-180 ms/
MODE3: 80-650 ms/
MODE4: 80-1000 ms/
MODE5: 200-1000 ms)
Feature & Programming References
Inter-digit Time [208]
2 0 8
NEXT SELECT
(5/10/15/20 s)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
END
END
DTMF Time [210]
2 1 0
NEXT SELECT
(MODE1: 80 ms/
MODE2: 160 ms)
STORE END
Note
This programme selects the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have
been set to "DTMF" in Dial Mode [401].
Feature & Programming References
228 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
No Dial Disconnection [211]
2 1 1
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE END
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
2 1 2
NEXT
time
(1…32 min)
STORE END
Note
This programme is available for the extension(s) enabled in CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613].
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Bell-off Detection [213]
2 1 3
NEXT SELECT
(3/6/12 s)
STORE END
Note
This programme selects the minimum time required by the PBX to confirm that the bell signal is no longer being sent from the telephone company, before the PBX acknowledges that the call is lost.
BV Recording Time [214]
2 1 4
NEXT time
(1…20 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
STORE END
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]
2 1 5
NEXT time
(1…15 min)
STORE END
Note
This programme selects the maximum recording time for each personal/common BV OGM.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Feature Guide 229
3.3 PT Programming
Carrier Exception Code [300]
3 0 0
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV code no.
(01…20)
To continue carrier code
STORE
Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]
3 0 1
NEXT SELECT
(Class-1…5)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
STORE END
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 X
NEXT code no.
(02…05)
02: for Class 2
03: for Class 3
04: for Class 4
05: for Class 5
(01…20)
Feature & Programming References
phone no.
STORE
Max. 11 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
SELECT
END
TRS—Exception Code [306]
3 0 6
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV code no.
(01…80)
To continue phone no.
STORE
Max. 11 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
SELECT
END
230 Feature Guide
Feature & Programming References
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
Emergency Number [309]
3 0 9
NEXT code no.
(1…5)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue emergency no.
Max. 24 digits
(0…9)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
Account Code [310]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
3 1 0
NEXT code no.
(01…50)
account code
4 digits
(0…9)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 1 1
NEXT code no.
(01…40)
pause code
Max. 11 digits
(0…9)
SELECT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
Feature & Programming References
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 231
3.3 PT Programming
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]
3 1 2
NEXT SELECT
(COS-2…5/
Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE
ARS Selection [350]
END
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 5 0
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 X
NEXT
(51…54)
51: for Route 1
52: for Route 2
53: for Route 3
54: for Route 4
code no.
(01…80)
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
area code
STORE
Max. 7 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
SELECT
END
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
3 X
(55…58)
55: for Route 1
56: for Route 2
57: for Route 3
58: for Route 4
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV code no.
(01…80)
To continue area code
STORE
Max. 7 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
END
SELECT
232 Feature Guide
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1st Carrier Selection Code [359]
3 5 9
NEXT first carrier access code
STORE END
Max. 4 digits
(0…9)
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6 0
NEXT route no.
removed digits
STORE END
(1…4) (0…9)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6 1
NEXT route no.
added number
STORE END
(1…4) Max. 20 digits
(0…9, , #, P)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS Dial Tone [362]
3 6 2
NEXT SELECT
(Tone1/Tone2/
Tone3/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 233
3.3 PT Programming
ARS Inter-digit Time [363]
3 6 3
NEXT
time
(1…20 s)
STORE END
Note
This assignment should be the same as the inter-digit timer assigned in Inter-digit Time [208].
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS CO Line Group [364]
NEXT
or
PREV
3 6 4
NEXT route no.
(1…4)
CO line group no.
(1…8/ )
To continue
STORE END
To continue
SELECT
Note
The assignments in Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] are effective for this programme.
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]
NEXT
or
PREV
3 X
(81…84)
81: for Route 1
82: for Route 2
83: for Route 3
84: for Route 4
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
authorisation code
Max. 19 digits
(0
…
9, , #, P)
SELECT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
234 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
NEXT
or
PREV
3 X
NEXT
CO line no.
(85…88)
85: for Route 1
86: for Route 2
87: for Route 3
88: for Route 4
(1…8/ )
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Itemised Billing Code [389]
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 8 9
NEXT extension jack no.
itemised billing code
STORE END
(01…24/ )
Max. 3 digits
(0
…
9, , #, P)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 9 0
NEXT route no.
(1…4/ )
(C.A.I.H/
C.I.A.H)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Note
C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Feature Guide 235
3.3 PT Programming
CO Line Connection [400]
4 0 0
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
To continue
STORE
(Connect/
Not connect)
SELECT
To continue
END
Note
The numbers of outside (CO) line ports that do not have lines connected should be set to "Not connect".
The PBX seizes the highest available outside (CO) line number when selecting an idle outside (CO) line automatically. If an unconnected outside (CO) line number is set to "Connect" and is numbered higher than any connected outside (CO) line number, the PBX will try to seize the unconnected outside
(CO) line.
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Dial Mode [401]
4 0 1
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
(DTMF/Pulse/
Call Block mode)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
This programme is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
Feature & Programming References
236 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Pulse Speed [402]
4 0 2
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
STORE
(1…8/ )
(Low Speed: 10 pps/
High Speed: 20 pps)
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
This programme is not available for the AL (Australia) model.
Feature & Programming References
Host PBX Access Code [403]
4 0 3
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
access code
STORE
Up to 8 access codes
1 or 2 digits
(0
…
9, , #)
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
Insert "," (CONF/MESSAGE button) between each access code using the comma button on the overlay.
For example, to store access codes 81 and 82 on outside (CO) line 1, programme as follows:
403 NEXT 1 81,82 STORE END
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Feature Guide 237
3.3 PT Programming
CO Line Group Number [404]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 4
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
CO line group no.
(1
…
8)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
END
NEXT
or
âžž
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
âžž
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4 X
NEXT
(05…07)
05: for day
06: for night
07: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
# extension jack no.
SELECT
(01…24/ )
To continue
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
SELECT
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another line number
Note
It is impossible to disable all extensions for all outside (CO) lines in each time service mode (day/night/ lunch). In each mode, at least one extension must be allowed to make an outside (CO) line call.
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
238 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
NEXT
or
âžž
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
âžž
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4 X
(08…10)
08: for day
09: for night
10: for lunch
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
# extension jack no.
SELECT
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
STORE END
SELECT
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another line number
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
NEXT
or
âžž
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
âžž
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4 X
NEXT
(11…13)
11: for day
12: for night
13: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
# extension jack no.
SELECT
(01…24/ )
STORE
Refer to the note.*
END
SELECT
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
Go to another line number
Note
Lunch [408-410] depends on your country/area as follows:
For United Kingdom: Immediately, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s
For Others: Immediately, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s
Feature Guide 239
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
<To select Normal, UCD, and/or MODEM>
NEXT
or
PREV
4 X
NEXT
(14…16)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
<To select BV>
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
(Normal/UCD/
MODEM)
SELECT
To continue
STORE
To continue
END
4 X
NEXT
CO line no.
(14…16)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
(1…8/ )
<To select DISA>
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
(BV)
SELECT common BV OGM no.
STORE
(01…24)
To continue
END
4 X
(14…16)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
NEXT
<To select DIL>
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
NEXT
or
PREV
(DISA)
DISA OGM no.
(1…8)
To continue
STORE END
To continue
SELECT
4 X
(14…16)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
NEXT
or
PREV
(DIL)
To continue extension jack no.
(01…24)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
240 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Notes
•
When you select "UCD", it is necessary to assign an extension group as the UCD group in UCD
•
After you select "BV", do not change Operator Assignment [008].
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
Pause Time [417]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 1 7
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
(1.5/2.5/
3.5/4.5 s)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
Flash/Recall Time [418]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 1 8
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
STORE
(80/100/160/
300/600/900/
1200 ms)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Feature Guide 241
3.3 PT Programming
Automatic Designated Line Access [419]
NEXT
or
PREV
4 1 9
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]
4 2 0
NEXT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
X
(00
…
75)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
CPC signal detect time selection number:
00: Disable; 01–75: 22–614 ms (detect time: 8 ms increments)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]
4 2 1
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
When this programme is disabled, CPC Signal Detection is only activated during an incoming outside
(CO) line call.
242 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Disconnect Time [422]
4 2 2
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
Refer to the note.*
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Notes
• * The disconnect signal lengths that can be selected depend on your country/area as follows:
For United Kingdom: 0.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s
For South Africa: 0.8 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s
For Others: 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s
• The time you select must be longer than the requirements of your telephone company or host PBX.
Feature & Programming References
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
4 2 3
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT STORE
(Single/Double/
Triple)
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Feature Guide 243
3.3 PT Programming
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 2 4
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only)
4 2 5
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Note
This programme enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls from the telephone company.
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 2 6
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
244 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429]
(New Zealand only)
NEXT
or
âžž
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
âžž
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4 X
NEXT
(27…29)
27: for day
28: for night
29: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
# extension jack no.
SELECT STORE END
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another line number
Note
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432]
(New Zealand only)
NEXT
or
âžž
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
âžž
4 X
NEXT
(30…32)
30: for day
31: for night
32: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
# extension jack no.
SELECT STORE END
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another line number
Feature Guide 245
3.3 PT Programming
Note
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 X
NEXT
(33…34)
33: for Pattern 2
34: for Pattern 3
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT STORE
(Single/Double/
Triple)
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
4 X
NEXT
(38…40)
38: for day
39: for night
40: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
SELECT
(BV01
…
24/
Not Stored)
Call Charge Calculation [441]
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 4 1
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
246 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Call Charge Table Assignment [442]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 4 2
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Table1/Table2/
Table3/Table4)
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]
5 0 0
NEXT SELECT
(Without AA/
With AA)
STORE END
Note
Without AA: Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in Extension Number [009],
Outside (CO) Line Access numbers (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 88), and the Operator
Call number (0 or 9)
With AA: Available destinations are numbers available in "Without AA" mode and numbers (0 through
9) assigned in DISA Built-in AA [501]
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Built-in AA [501]
5 0 1
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
AA no.
(0…9)
SELECT
(Jack/GRP/
3-level AA/
Not Stored)
To continue extension jack no.
(01…24) or
extension group no.
(1…8)
STORE END
Note
If you would like to use the Automatic Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9]) and/or
Operator Call number in AA mode, do not assign AA number(s) that correspond to Automatic Line
Access or Operator Call numbers (9 and/or 0).
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Feature Guide 247
3.3 PT Programming
FAX Connection [503]
5 0 3
NEXT extension jack no.
STORE END
(01…24/Disable)
Notes
• To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
• The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]
5 0 4
NEXT SELECT
(0/3/6/12 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
5 0 7
NEXT SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE
END
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]
5 0 5
NEXT SELECT
(0/5/10/15 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE END
DISA Busy Mode [506]
<To select Disconnect or Call Waiting>
5 0 6
NEXT SELECT
(Disconnect/
Call Waiting)
STORE
<To select DISA>
5 0 6
NEXT SELECT
DISA OGM no.
(DISA)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
(1…8)
END
STORE
END
END
248 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
5 0 8
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]
5 0 9
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
STORE
DISA No Dial Mode [510]
5 1 0
NEXT SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
END
END
END
DISA Security Mode [511]
5 1 1
NEXT SELECT
(Trunk/All/
None Security)
STORE END
Note
before making an outside (CO) line call.
All Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside (CO) line or intercom call.
Feature Guide 249
3.3 PT Programming
No Security: Allows the caller to make either an outside (CO) line or intercom call without entering a
DISA security code.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Code [512]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
5 1 2
NEXT code no.
security code
STORE END
(1…4) 4…10 digits
(0…9)
To continue
SELECT
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO)
Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a)
Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b)
Maintaining the secrecy of passwords.
c)
Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
d)
Changing passwords regularly.
Notes
•
• Each DISA security code should be unique.
•
The number of digits for DISA security codes is selected in DISA Security Code Digits [530].
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Cyclic Tone Detection [513]
5 1 3
NEXT SELECT
(Disable/
2/3/4 times)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE END
250 Feature Guide
FAX Tone Detection [514]
5 1 4
NEXT SELECT
(1/2 time(s))
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]
5 1 5
NEXT SELECT
(3/6/9 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
DISA Incoming Assignment [516]
END
END
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
5 1 6
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA AA Wait Time [517]
5 1 7
NEXT SELECT
(1…5 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]
5 1 8
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
END
END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 251
3.3 PT Programming
OGM Mute Time [519]
5 1 9
NEXT SELECT
(0/2/4/6 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
STORE END
UCD Group [520]
5 2 0
NEXT extension group no.
STORE END
(1…8)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
5 2 1
NEXT waiting time
SELECT
(1…32 min/1…59 s) (min/s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
STORE
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]
5 2 2
NEXT SELECT
(30 s/
1/1.5/2 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
STORE END
UCD Busy Mode [523]
<To select Intercept-Normal or Disconnect>
5 2 3
NEXT SELECT STORE
(Intercept-Normal/
Disconnect)
<To select Intercept-DISA or Disconnect-OGM>
5 2 3
END
NEXT SELECT
(Intercept-DISA/
Disconnect-OGM)
DISA/UCD OGM no.
(1…8)
END
STORE END
252 Feature Guide
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
5 2 4
NEXT SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
STORE
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]
5 2 5
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
STORE
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]
5 2 6
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
STORE
END
END
END
UCD Waiting Message [527]
5 2 7
NEXT
UCD OGM no.
(1…8/
Not Stored)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
5 3 0
NEXT SELECT
(4…10 digits)
STORE
STORE
END
END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 253
3.3 PT Programming
Note
When this setting is changed, DISA security codes that have already been assigned in DISA Security
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Ringback Tone [531]
5 3 1
NEXT SELECT
(Ringback Tone/
Hold Music)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
STORE
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
END
Go to another third AA number
5 X
NEXT
(40…49)
[40-49: AA no. 0-9]
NEXT
or
second
AA no.
third
AA no.
(0…9)
(0…9, )
[ : Skip]
(Jack/GRP/
3-level AA/
Not Stored)
PREV
Go to next or prev. third AA number
extension jack no.
(01…24) or
extension group no.
(1…8)
To continue
STORE END
Notes
•
• Only when you select " " as the third AA number, you can select "3-level AA" in the next step.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]
5 9 9
NEXT STORE END
Feature & Programming References
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
254 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Extension Group [600]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 0
NEXT extension jack no.
extension group no.
STORE END
(01…24/ ) (1…8)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 X
NEXT extension jack no.
COS no.
STORE
(01…24/ ) (1…5)
(01…03)
01: for day
02: for night
03: for lunch
SELECT
To continue
Feature & Programming References
Extension Name [604]
NEXT
or
PREV
END
To continue
6 0 4
NEXT extension jack no.
extension name*
STORE END
(01…24)
Max.
10 characters
To continue
SELECT
Note
* An extension name can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between
"Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
Feature Guide 255
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
Account Code Mode [605]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 5
NEXT extension jack no.
SELECT
(01…24/ )
(Option/Forced/
Verify-All/Verify-Toll)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 6
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 7
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
256 Feature Guide
Executive Busy Override [608]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 8
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
DND Override [609]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 9
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
Parallelled Telephone [610]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 0
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 257
3.3 PT Programming
TAM Extension [611]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 1
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
Room Monitor [612]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 2
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Note
Extensions that are to be monitored must have their jacks set to "Enable" in this programme in advance.
Feature & Programming References
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 3
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
258 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Internal Pulse Detection [614]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 4
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
LCD Language [615]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 5
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
Refer to the note.*
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Notes
• * The following languages are available for the LCD:
English; Spanish; Portuguese; Russian; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian;
Ukrainian
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
• Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.
• When "Russian" or "Ukrainian" is selected in this programme, during intercom calls, the calling
extension's name assigned in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] is displayed at the called extension.
When another language is selected, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]
6 1 6
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension jack no.
(01…24)
extension name*
Max.
10 characters
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature Guide 259
3.3 PT Programming
Notes
• * An extension name can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode", and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
• Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.
Feature & Programming References
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
6 1 8
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
SLT Message Waiting [619]
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
6 1 9
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
To continue
260 Feature Guide
LCS Recording Mode Set [620]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 2 0
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(Stop recording/
Keep recording)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
BV Resource [621]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 2 1
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Resource 1/2)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BV for Extension [622]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
6 2 2
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
To continue
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 261
3.3 PT Programming
BV Access Code through CO Line [625]
6 2 5
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV extension jack no.
(01…24)
To continue voice message access code
4
…
10 digits
(0
…
9, #)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Notes
• A voice message access code should be different from the corresponding extension number. If the voice message access code is the same as an extension number, dialling that number will access the extension, not the voice message area.
• A code that starts with a number already assigned as another code cannot be used. For example, if you assign the codes "1234" and "12345", "12345" cannot be selected since "1234" will be recognised first.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BGM Control for APT [626]
NEXT
or
PREV
6 2 6
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
To continue
6 2 7
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(
0…15 s)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
To continue
STORE END
To continue
262 Feature Guide
SLT Caller ID [628]
NEXT
or
PREV
6 2 8
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]
To continue
STORE END
To continue
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 2 9
NEXT extension jack no. name*
(01…24/ )
(Disable/
Single/Double)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
LCD Display Mode [630]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 3 0
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Charge/
Duration)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 263
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
NEXT
or
âžž
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. doorphone number or
âžž
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
7 X
NEXT
(00…02)
00: for day
01: for night
02: for lunch
doorphone no.
(1…4*/ )
# extension jack no.
SELECT STORE END
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another doorphone number
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the doorphone number.
Feature & Programming References
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. door opener number
âžž or
âžž
To continue
Go to next or prev. jack number
7 X
(03…05)
03: for day
04: for night
05: for lunch
NEXT door opener no.
(1…4*/ )
# extension jack no.
SELECT STORE END
(01…24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another door opener number
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the door opener number.
264 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 0 6
NEXT doorphone no.
(1…4*/ )
SELECT
(Single/Double/
Triple/S-Double)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Notes
• * When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1"and/or "2") as the doorphone number.
• It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Doorphone Access Tone [707]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 0 7
NEXT doorphone no.
(1…4*/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the doorphone number.
Feature & Programming References
Feature Guide 265
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Ring Time [708]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 0 8
NEXT doorphone no.
(1…4*/ )
SELECT
(15/30 s)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the doorphone number.
Feature & Programming References
Door Open Duration [709]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 0 9
NEXT door opener no.
(1…4*/ )
SELECT
(1
…
8 s)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the door opener number.
Feature & Programming References
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 1 0
NEXT doorphone no.
name*
(1…4*/ )
(Ring/Chime/
Ring & Chime)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
266 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the doorphone number.
Feature & Programming References
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 1 1
NEXT doorphone no.
(1…4*/ )
SELECT
(Relay1
…
4*)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the doorphone and relay numbers.
Feature & Programming References
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
7 1 2
NEXT doorphone no.
(1…4*/ )
SELECT
(Pattern1…8)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
* When using an optional 2-port doorphone card, select "1" and/or "3" (not "1" and/or "2") as the doorphone number.
Feature & Programming References
Feature Guide 267
3.3 PT Programming
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]
<Select the new line code> <Select the baud rate>
8 0 0
NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE
(CR+LF/CR)
CR: Carriage Return
LF: Line Feed
<Select the word length> <Select the parity>
(1200/2400/
4800/9600 B)
<Select the stop bit length>
NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE
(7/8 bits) (Mark/Space/
Even/Odd/
None*)
(1 bit/2 bits)
END
Notes
• * Select "None" when the printer does not require error checking.
• The following combinations are invalid.
Parity
Mark
Space
Space
Word length
8
8
8
Stop bit length
If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone will be heard.
2
1
2
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
SMDR Parameter [801]
<Select the page length>
8 0 1
NEXT page length
(4…99 lines)
<Select the skip perforation>
STORE
NEXT skip perforation
STORE END
(0…95 lines)
Note
To enable the changes, you must turn the power switch of the PBX off and back on again after changing this setting.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
268 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]
<Select an outgoing call>
8 0 2
NEXT SELECT STORE
(On/Off/Toll)
<Select an incoming call>
NEXT SELECT STORE
(On/Off)
Note
Outgoing Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)/Toll (Print toll calls only)
Incoming Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)
END
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]
8 0 3
NEXT SELECT STORE
(No Printing/
Printing)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
END
System Data Dump [804]
<To select All parameters, System parameter, Speed dial, and/or Stop output>
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT STORE
(All para/
System para/
Speed dial/
Stop output)
To continue
END
<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
(CO para)
STORE
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
STORE
To continue
END
<To select the Extension parameter>
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
(Extn. para)
STORE extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
STORE
To continue
END
Feature Guide 269
3.3 PT Programming
<To select the DSS parameter>
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
(DSS para)
STORE
DSS console no.
(1…2/ )
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
SMDR Account Code [805]
8 0 5
NEXT SELECT STORE END
(CODE/INDEX)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
SMDR Language [806]
8 0 6
NEXT SELECT STORE
Refer to the note.*
END
Note
* The following languages are available for SMDR:
English; Spanish; Portuguese; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
BV Total Recording Time [807]
8 0 7
NEXT SELECT
(20/30/60 min)
STORE END
Note
The recording quality depends on the setting time.
20 (min): High; 30: Normal; 60: Low
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
270 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
BV Card Initialisation [808]
8 0 8
NEXT STORE
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Caller ID [900]
9 0 0
NEXT
END
NEXT
or
PREV
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
Note
The DISA Delayed Answer Time for the outside (CO) lines enabled here will always be 6 seconds even
if "0 s" or "3 s" is selected in DISA Delayed Answer Time [504].
Feature & Programming References
Caller ID Area Code [901]
9 0 1
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV code no.
(1…5)
To continue area code
Max. 6 digits
(0…9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Feature & Programming References
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
Feature Guide 271
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
SELECT
To continue
9 0 2
NEXT code no.
(1…5)
<Select the removed digits>
removed digits
STORE END
(0…9)
<Select the added number>
âžž
added number
STORE
Max. 4 digits
(0…9, , #)
END
Feature & Programming References
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
<Select the removed digits>
9 0 3
NEXT removed digits
STORE END
(0…9)
Feature & Programming References
<Select the added number>
âžž
added number
Max. 4 digits
(0…9, , #)
STORE END
Caller ID Log Priority [904]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE END
9 0 4
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Name/
Number)
SELECT
To continue
Note
This programme is available when the Caller ID service provides both a name and a number. If only the number is provided, this programme is not necessary.
Feature & Programming References
272 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]
9 0 5
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
STORE END
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]
9 0 6
NEXT SELECT STORE
(Without CID: Not printed/
With CID: Printed)
END
Note
Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]
9 0 7
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Note
This programme enables a caller's telephone number to be shown by SMDR before the call is answered.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Common Area Call Log Check [909]
NEXT
or
PREV
9 0 9
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
Feature & Programming References
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
Feature Guide 273
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID Type [910]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
9 1 0
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
SELECT STORE
(FSK/DTMF)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
Currency [921]
9 2 1
NEXT currency*
Max. 3 characters
STORE END
Note
* Currency can be entered using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]
9 2 2
NEXT SELECT STORE
(With Charge/
Without Charge)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
END
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]
9 2 3
NEXT SELECT
(MODE 1/MODE 2)
STORE END
Note
MODE 1: Does not print out zeros (e.g., 2.86).
MODE 2: Prints out zeros (e.g., 00002.86).
274 Feature Guide
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
Secret Printing [924]
9 2 4
NEXT SELECT
(No Secret/Secret)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
STORE
Budget Management [925]
END
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
9 2 5
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
Budget Limit Selection [926]
9 2 6
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE
Note
Enable: Disconnect the call after the beeps.
Disable: From the next call.
END
Feature & Programming References
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
Call Log Next Page [927]
9 2 7
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 275
3.3 PT Programming
Note
This programme enables the PBX to include page breaks when printing out call logs for each extension.
SMDR Mode for Printing [929]
9 2 9
NEXT SELECT STORE
(MODE 1/MODE 2)
END
Note
not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Call Forwarding Selection [963]
NEXT
or
PREV
9 6 3
NEXT extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
To continue
STORE END
To continue
Note
This programme also functions for outside (CO) line calls via the DISA Intercept Routing feature, and when DISA calls are received by a DISA ring group.
Feature & Programming References
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
TRS Check after Answering [966]
9 6 6
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE END
Note
This programme specifies whether the PBX checks DTMF signals when answering calls or not.
276 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
TRS Check Time after Answering [967]
9 6 7
NEXT STORE SELECT
(5/10/15/
20/30/60 s)
END
Note
This programme specifies the length of time that the DTMF signal is checked when "Enable" is selected
in TRS Check after Answering [966].
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]
9 6 8
NEXT SELECT STORE
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
END
Country [995]
9 9 5
NEXT SELECT
(NE: NE (ES)/NE (IT))
(CE: CE/CE (CZ))
STORE
Notes
• This programme specifies your country/area when the suffix of the PBX is "NE" or "CE". For more information, please consult your dealer.
• When the country code is changed, all system data is initialised.
Feature & Programming References
Firmware Version [998]
9 9 8
NEXT SELECT
SELECT
END
Display Example
< ROM >
Y501A 040430 (BX)
< Firmware >
1.0.0
Version Date Version
Note
You can confirm the ROM and the firmware version of the PBX alternately by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
Feature Guide 277
3.3 PT Programming
System Data Clear [999]
<To select All parameters, System parameter, and/or Speed dial>
9 9 9
NEXT SELECT STORE
(All para/
System para/
Speed dial)
To continue
END
<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>
9 9 9
NEXT SELECT
(CO para)
STORE
CO line no.
(1…8/ )
STORE
To continue
END
<To select the Extension parameter>
9 9 9
NEXT SELECT
(Extn. para)
STORE extension jack no.
(01…24/ )
STORE
To continue
END
<To select the DSS parameter>
9 9 9
NEXT SELECT
(DSS para)
STORE
DSS console no.
(1…2/ )
STORE
To continue
END
Feature & Programming References
278 Feature Guide
Section 4
Appendix
Feature Guide 279
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
4.1
Capacity of System Resources
4.1.1
Capacity of System Resources
System
Dialling
Category
Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)
Item
Outside (CO) Line Group
Extension Group
Absent Message
Message Waiting
Number of Characters of Name
Extension Number Digits
Call Park Zone
Conference (5-party)
Account Code
Host PBX Access Code
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)
Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Intercom Call
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/
UCD
Emergency Call
Quick Dialling
System Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dialling
One-touch Dialling
Hot Line
Redial
Leading Number Table
Leading Number Exception Table
ARS Carrier
KX-TES824/KX-TEM824
8
8
6 × 16 characters
8/extn.
10
2 or 3
10
1
4 digits, 50 entries
1 or 2 digits, 8 entries
64 calls (10 000 calls with optional message expansion card)
500 calls (10 000 calls with optional message expansion card)
4
32 resources/PBX (8 resources for Direct Inward
System Access [DISA]/
Uniform Call Distribution
[UCD], 24 resources for 3-level
Automated Attendant [AA])
24 digits, 5 entries
10 digits, 10 entries
32 digits, 100 entries
24 digits, 10 entries/extn.
24 digits
32 digits
64 digits
7 digits, 80 entries
7 digits, 80 entries
4
280 Feature Guide
Category
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Call Log
Password
Item
Class of Service (COS)
Denied Code Table
Exception Code Table
Incoming Call Log
System Password
Extension Password
Voice Message Access Code
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
KX-TES824/KX-TEM824
5
11 digits, 80 entries
11 digits, 80 entries
20 entries/extn.,
300 entries/PBX
125 voice messages/Built-in
Voice Message (BV) resource
4–7 digits
4 digits
4–10 digits
Feature Guide 281
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
4.2
Tones/Ring Tones
4.2.1
Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns
Dial Tone 1
Normal
1 s
[Brazil only]
1 s
Dial Tone 2
Any of the following features is set:
1 s
• Absent Message
• Background Music
(BGM) (proprietary telephone [PT] only)
• Call Forwarding
(FWD)
• Call Pickup Deny
[Brazil only]
1 s
• Data Line Security
• Do Not Disturb
(DND)
• Extension Lock
• Hot Line (single line telephone [SLT] only)
[Czech Republic only]
1 s
• Message Waiting
(PT only)
• Remote Extension
Lock
• Timed Reminder
Dial Tone 3
• When going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting
• When Account Code
Entry is performed
• When answering a call from Timed
Reminder
1 s
282 Feature Guide
Dial Tone 4
A new voice message has been recorded (Built-in Voice
Message [BV]).
1 s
[Brazil only]
1 s
Dial Tone 5
1 s
The remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice
Message [BV]).
[Brazil only]
1 s
Busy Tones
1 s
[Australia/New Zealand only]
1 s
[Brazil only]
1 s
[Czech Republic only]
1 s
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide 283
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Reorder Tones
The outside (CO) line you tried to seize is not assigned or was denied.
1 s
[Brazil only]
1 s
[Czech Republic only]
1 s
Ringback Tones
Single (3-s interval)
Double (3-s interval)
Single (5-s interval)
Double (5-s interval)
DND Tone
The dialled extension is refusing incoming calls.
Call Waiting Tone 1
[Malaysia only]
1 s
1 s
1 s
1 s
1 s
1 s
15 s
284 Feature Guide
Call Waiting Tone 2
Single
Double
1 s
1 s
Triple
1 s
Hold Alarm Tone
A call has been on hold for longer than the specified time.
Warning Tone (Outside
(CO) Line Call Limitation)
This tone is sent 15 seconds before the specified time for disconnection.
Confirmation Tone 1
The feature was set successfully, or the Extension
Lock feature was set or cancelled.
Confirmation Tone 2
The new feature setting was the same as the previous setting, or certain features were successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold,
Automatic Callback Busy).
Confirmation Tone 3
Before the following features activate:
• Retrieving a held call
• Picking up another call
• Establishing a conference call
• Paging/Answering a paging announcement
1 s
1 s
1 s
1 s
15 s
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide 285
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Ring Tone Patterns
Ring Tone Patterns
The following ring tone patterns can be assigned to incoming call types (outside (CO) line, intercom, or doorphone calls), or are fixed for certain features (Hold Recall [outside (CO) line calls/intercom calls], Timed
Reminder, or Camp-on Recall).
Single
• Selectable: outside (CO) line calls, intercom calls, doorphone calls
• Fixed: Hold Recall
[outside (CO) line calls]
Double
• Selectable: outside (CO) line calls, intercom calls, doorphone calls
• Fixed: Hold Recall
[intercom calls]
Triple
• Selectable: outside (CO) line calls, intercom calls, doorphone calls
• Fixed: Timed Reminder
S-Double
• Selectable: doorphone calls
• Fixed: Camp-on Recall
1 s
1 s
1 s
1 s
Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand only)
The following ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company can be detected for each outside (CO) line.
Pattern 1
1 s
Pattern 2
1 s
Pattern 3
1 s
286 Feature Guide
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Pattern 4
1 s
Doorphone Chime Patterns
The following doorphone chime patterns can be assigned to each doorphone when doorbells and door chimes are connected to the PBX.
Pattern 1*
1 s
Pattern 2*
1 s
Pattern 3*
1 s
Pattern 4*
1 s
Pattern 5
1 s
Pattern 6
1 s
Pattern 7
1 s
Pattern 8
1 s
* Chime patterns 1 to 4 are played only one time during the doorphone ringing time.
Feature Guide 287
4.3 Revision History
4.3
Revision History
4.3.1
Version 2.0
New Contents
•
•
•
1.20.2 Call Charge Calculation
•
Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]
Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/184]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/185]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/186]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/187]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/181/188]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/182/189]
Call Charge Table Assignment [442]
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]
Changed Contents
•
•
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
•
•
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature
1.20.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
288 Feature Guide
1.20.1.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
•
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
•
•
3.3.1 Programming Instructions
•
4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources
•
4.3 Revision History
Feature Guide 289
4.3 Revision History
290 Feature Guide
Index
Feature Guide 291
Index
Numerics
1st Carrier Selection Code [359]
2-way Recording into the VPS
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
3-level Automated Attendant (AA)
3-party Conference
5-party Conference
A
Absent Message
Account Code [310]
Account Code Entry
Account Code Mode [605]
Administrative Information Features
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Answering Features
Answering Features—OVERVIEW
Appendix
ARS CO Line Group [364]
ARS Dial Tone [362]
ARS Inter-digit Time [363]
ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
ARS Selection [350]
ARS —> Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Audible Tone Features
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]
Authorisation Code
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
Automatic Designated Line Access [419]
Automatic Line Access (Local Access)
Automatic Line Access [121]
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
Automatic Redial
Automatic Redial Interval [114]
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
Automatic Time Adjustment
Automatic Time Adjustment [152]
B
Background Music (BGM)
Bell Frequency [120]
Bell-off Detection [213]
BGM Control for APT [626]
BGM —> Background Music (BGM)
Break Ratio [123]
Budget Limit Selection [926]
Budget Management
Budget Management [925]
Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Busy Line/Busy Party Features
Busy Tones
Buttons and Functions
BV Access Code through CO Line [625]
292 Feature Guide
BV Card Initialisation [808]
BV for Extension [622]
BV Recording Time [214]
BV Resource [621]
BV Total Recording Time [807]
BV —> Built-in Voice Message (BV)
C
Call Charge Calculation
Call Charge Calculation [441]
Call Charge Calculation—Registering Leading Numbers [161]
Call Charge Calculation—Time Table 1/2/3/4 [162/169/176/183]
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 [922]
Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 [923]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Flat Charge and Duration [167/174/
181/188]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Economy Unit Charge and Duration [168/175/
182/189]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration [165/172/179/
186]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Off Peak Unit Charge and Duration [166/173/180/
187]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Flat Charge and Duration [163/170/177/
184]
Call Charge Table 1/2/3/4—Peak Unit Charge and Duration [164/171/178/
185]
Call Charge Table Assignment [442]
Call Duration Counter Start [204]
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW
Call Forwarding Selection [963]
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]
Call Handling Features
Call Hold
Call Log Next Page [927]
Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Call Park
Call Park Recall
Call Pickup
Call Pickup Deny
Call Pickup Tone [117]
Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM)
Call Splitting
Call Transfer
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]
Call Transfer with Announcement
Call Transfer without Announcement
Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement
Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Tone
Caller ID
Caller ID [900]
Caller ID Area Code [901]
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]
Caller ID Display on SLT
Caller ID Features
Caller ID Log Priority [904]
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]
Caller ID Type [910]
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Capacity of System Resources
Carrier Exception Code [300]
Circular Hunting
Class of Service (COS)
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]
CO Busy Out
CO Busy Out [154]
CO Busy Out Check Time [155]
CO Indicator [109]
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]
CO Line Connection [400]
CO Line Group Number [404]
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only)
Common Area Call Log Check [909]
Common BV OGM
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]
Conference
Conference Features
Conference Features—OVERVIEW
Conference Pattern [116]
Conference Tone [105]
Confirmation Tone
Console Paired Telephone [004]
Consultation Hold
Conversation Features
COS —> Class of Service (COS)
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]
Country [995]
Country Setting
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]
CPC —> Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Currency [921]
Cyclic Tone Detection [513]
D
Data Line Security
Date & Time [000]
Decimal Places [190]
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
Denied Code Tables
Dial Mode [401]
Dial Tone
Dial Type Selection
Dialling Start Time [206]
DIL —> Direct In Line (DIL)
Direct In Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Index
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
Direct Message feature
Direct One-touch Answering
Direct Outside (CO) Line Access
Directed Call Pickup
DISA AA Service
DISA AA Wait Time [517]
DISA Built-in AA [501]
DISA Busy Mode [506]
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]
DISA Incoming Assignment [516]
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
DISA No Dial Mode [510]
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
DISA Ringback Tone [531]
DISA Security Code [512]
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
DISA Security Mode [511]
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]
DISA —> Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Disconnect Time [422]
Display Information
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DND Override
DND Override [609]
DND Tone
DND —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Door Open
Door Open Duration [709]
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]
Doorbell/Door Chime
Doorphone Access Tone [707]
Doorphone Call
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]
Doorphone Chime Patterns
Doorphone Ring Time [708]
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only)
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429]
(New Zealand only)
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432]
(New Zealand only)
DRD —> Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
DSS Lamp Mode [112]
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]
DTMF Integration [103]
DTMF Integration Port [102]
DTMF Receiver Check [107]
DTMF Time [210]
Feature Guide 293
Index
E
EFA —> External Feature Access (EFA)
Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Lock
Emergency Call
Emergency Number [309]
Entering Characters
Entering Manager Programming Mode
Entering System Programming Mode
Exception Code Tables
Exclusive Call Hold
Executive Busy Override
Executive Busy Override [608]
Executive Busy Override Deny
Extension Controlling Features
Extension Feature Clear
Extension Group [600]
Extension Jack Configuration
Extension Lock
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
Extension Name [604]
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]
Extension Number [009]
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
External Feature Access (EFA)
External Pager Access Tone [106]
F
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
FAX Connection [503]
FAX Tone Detection [514]
Feature Guide References
Feature Highlights
Feature Numbering
Firmware Upgrade
Firmware Version [998]
Fixed Buttons
Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
Flash/Recall
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110]
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]
Flash/Recall Time [418]
Flexible Buttons
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
FWD to Outside (CO) Line
FWD —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD—All Calls
FWD—Busy/No Answer
FWD—Follow Me
G
General Call Hold
Group
Group Call Pickup
H
Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation
Hands-free Answerback
Hands-free Operation
Headset Operation
Hold Recall
Hold Recall Time [200]
Holding Features
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a
Host PBX)
Host PBX Access Code [403]
Hot Line
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]
Hunting Group Set [100]
Hunting Type [101]
I
Idle Extension Hunting
Idle Line Preference
Incoming Call Features
Incoming Call Indication Features
Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW
Incoming Call Log
Incoming Call Log Display Lock
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features
Incoming Reverse [153]
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]
Installation Manual References
Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console
Intercept Routing
Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
Intercept Routing—No Dial
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]
Intercom Call
Intercom Call Features
Inter-digit Time [208]
Internal Call Features
Internal Pulse Detection [614]
Introduction
IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
Itemised Billing Code
Itemised Billing Code [389]
K
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]
L
Last Number Redial
LCD Display Mode [630]
LCD Language [615]
LCD Time Display [010]
LCS Recording Mode Set [620]
LED Indication
Line Preference Override
Line Preference—Incoming
294 Feature Guide
Line Preference—Outgoing
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Lockout
Log-in/Log-out
M
Making Call Features
Memory Dialling Features
Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW
Message Features
Message Waiting
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]
Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock
Microphone Mute
Music on Hold
Music on Hold [111]
N
No Dial Disconnection [211]
No Line Preference
O
OGM Mute Time [519]
One-touch Dialling
One-touch Transfer
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]
Operator Assignment [008]
Operator Call
Operator/Manager Features
Optional Device Features
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
Outside (CO) Line Access
Outside (CO) Line Call Features
Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW
Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Outside (CO) Line Group Access
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration
P
Paging
Paging Deny
Paging Features
Paging—All Extensions
Paging—All Extensions & External
Paging—External
Paging—Group
Parallelled Telephone
Parallelled Telephone [610]
Password Security
Pause Insertion
Pause Time [417]
PC Programming
Personal BV OGM
Pickup Dialling —> Hot Line
Pickup Group [127]
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
Polarity Reverse Detection —> Reverse Circuit
Index
Power Failure Connections
Power Failure Restart
Power Failure Transfer
Prime Line Preference
Programming Instructions
Programming Procedures
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
PT Programming
PT Programming References
PT —> Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Pulse Restriction [118]
Pulse Speed [402]
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Q
Quick Dialling
R
Receiving Calls
Receiving Group Features
Redial
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]
Remote Extension Lock
Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Lock
Remote Timed Reminder
Reorder Tones
Required Telephone
Reverse Circuit
Revision History
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Ring Tone Patterns
Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand only)
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]
Ringback Tones
Ringing Line Preference
Room Monitor
Room Monitor [612]
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]
S
Saved Number Redial
S-CO Line Access
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]
Secret Dialling
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]
Secret Printing [924]
Seizing a Line Features
Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW
SLT Caller ID [628]
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]
SLT Hold Mode [104]
SLT Message Waiting [619]
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
Feature Guide 295
Index
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]
SMDR Account Code [805]
SMDR Language [806]
SMDR Mode for Printing [929]
SMDR Parameter [801]
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]
SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
SMS Routing Table—CO [146]
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]
SMS —> Short Message Service (SMS)
Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Station Feature Clear —> Extension Feature Clear
Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Message Detail Recording Feature
Station Programme Clear —> Extension Feature Clear
Station Speed Dialling —> Personal Speed Dialling
System Configuration and Administration Features
System Configuration—Hardware
System Configuration—Software
System Data Clear [999]
System Data Control
System Data Dump [804]
System Password [002]
System Requirements
System Speed Dialling Name [011]
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
T
TAM Extension [611]
TAM —> Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM)
Terminated Hunting
Time Service
Time Service Start Time [007]
Time Service Switching Mode [006]
Timed Reminder
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Tones/Ring Tones
Transfer Recall
Transfer Recall Time [201]
Transferring Features
TRS Check after Answering [966]
TRS Check for * and # [125]
TRS Check Time after Answering [967]
TRS for System Speed Dialling
TRS —> Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
TRS—Exception Code [306]
TRS—Extension Lock Class
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]
U
UCD Busy Mode [523]
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
UCD Group [520]
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]
UCD Waiting Message [527]
Unattended Conference
Unattended Conference Recall
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
User Manual References
V
Version 2.0
VM 1 APT Port [130]
VM 2 APT Port [131]
VM —> Voice Mail Features
Voice Mail APT Integration
Voice Mail Features
Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
W
Walking COS
Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation)
296 Feature Guide
Index
Feature Guide 297
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
Communications Co., Ltd.
© 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX3083VA
KK1104MN5125
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project